[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2018035416A1 - Reagents and methods for glycosylation - Google Patents

Reagents and methods for glycosylation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018035416A1
WO2018035416A1 PCT/US2017/047519 US2017047519W WO2018035416A1 WO 2018035416 A1 WO2018035416 A1 WO 2018035416A1 US 2017047519 W US2017047519 W US 2017047519W WO 2018035416 A1 WO2018035416 A1 WO 2018035416A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
salt
certain embodiments
group
alkyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/US2017/047519
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Aaron APONICK
Ji LIU
Romain J. MIOTTO
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
University of Florida
University of Florida Research Foundation Inc
Original Assignee
University of Florida
University of Florida Research Foundation Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by University of Florida, University of Florida Research Foundation Inc filed Critical University of Florida
Publication of WO2018035416A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018035416A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H23/00Compounds containing boron, silicon or a metal, e.g. chelates or vitamin B12
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H1/00Processes for the preparation of sugar derivatives
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H15/00Compounds containing hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals directly attached to hetero atoms of saccharide radicals
    • C07H15/20Carbocyclic rings
    • C07H15/203Monocyclic carbocyclic rings other than cyclohexane rings; Bicyclic carbocyclic ring systems

Definitions

  • the present invention provides systems, methods, and regents for the glycosylation of organic molecules and/or the synthesis of more complex carbohydrates.
  • the invention provides methods for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound (i.e., a glycosyl acceptor) comprising contacting a glycosyl donor with the hydroxyl-containing organic compound (i.e., the glycosyl acceptor), in the presence of an oxidant, to yield a glycosylated organic compound.
  • the glycosyl donor is a compound of one of the following formulae:
  • the glycosyl donor is:
  • Glycosyl acceptors useful in the methods provided herein are any compounds comprising a free hydroxyl group (i.e.,–OH group).
  • the compound comprising a free hydroxyl group may be a small molecule, large molecule, natural product, pharmaceutical drug, etc.
  • the compound containing a free hydroxyl group may also be a carbohydrate (e.g., monosaccharide, disaccharide, trisaccharide, polysaccharide).
  • sugars comprising free hydroxyl groups can be glycosyl acceptors, such as (but not limited to) compounds of the following formulae:
  • R 1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
  • the glycosyl acceptor is the following:
  • Scheme 1 shows a general outline of a certain embodiment of the methods provided herein.
  • the reaction of reagents such as 9 (a glycosyl donor; stereochemistry arbitrarily drawn as glucose as an example) and 10 (glycosyl acceptor; stereochemistry arbitrarily drawn as glucose as an example) provide the disaccharide 11, now containing a“latent glycosyl donor” moiety.
  • Pg is any hydroxyl protecting group, defined herein.
  • the method can further comprise a step of deprotecting the latent glycosyl donor moiety to unveil an active glycosyl donor, which can be used in a subsequent glycosylation step.
  • deprotection of the phenolic ester in 11 can be accomplished to reveal 13, and repeating the steps with a glycosyl acceptor such as 10, or other building blocks, would build up the saccharide.
  • a glycosyl acceptor such as 10, or other building blocks
  • the methods described herein offer the ability to grow the carbohydrate in multiple directions as needed.
  • the ability to form linear or branched substrates relies on tactical protecting group strategies (described herein). Additionally, protecting group choices can allow for predictable substrate control of anomeric selectivity, which is important in carbohydrate synthesis.
  • the present invention provides compounds (e.g., glycosyl donors and glycosyl acceptors), and salts thereof, which are useful in glycosylation reactions and in carbohydrate preparation.
  • the present invention provides kits comprising one or more of the compounds provided herein.
  • Compounds described herein can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various stereoisomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers.
  • the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer.
  • Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses.
  • HPLC high pressure liquid chromatography
  • a formula is a single bond where the stereochemistry of the moieties immediately attached thereto is not specified, is absent or a single bond, and or is a single or double bond.
  • the formula is meant to encompass all possible stereoisomers (e.g., enantiomers, diastereomers, epimers) of the compounds.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
  • compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, replacement of 19 F with 18 F, or the replacement of 12 C with 13 C or 14 C are within the scope of the disclosure. Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays.
  • C 1-6 alkyl is intended to encompass, C 1 , C 2 , C 3 , C 4 , C 5 , C 6 , C 1-6 , C 1-5 , C 1-4 , C 1-3 , C 1-2 , C 2-6 , C 2-5 , C 2-4 , C 2-3 , C 3-6 , C 3-5 , C 3-4 , C 4-6 , C 4-5 , and C 5-6 alkyl.
  • aliphatic refers to alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and carbocyclic groups.
  • heteroaliphatic refers to heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, and heterocyclic groups.
  • alkyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“C 1-10 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 9 carbon atoms (“C 1-9 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 1-8 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 7 carbon atoms (“C 1-7 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 1-6 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 1-5 alkyl”).
  • an alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C 1-4 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 1-3 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C 1-2 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 carbon atom (“C 1 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2-6 alkyl”).
  • C 1-6 alkyl groups include methyl (C 1 ), ethyl (C 2 ), propyl (C 3 ) (e.g., n-propyl, isopropyl), butyl (C 4 ) (e.g., n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl), pentyl (C 5 ) (e.g., n-pentyl, 3-pentanyl, amyl, neopentyl, 3-methyl-2-butanyl, tertiary amyl), and hexyl (C 6 ) (e.g., n-hexyl).
  • alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C 7 ), n- octyl (C 8 ), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted alkyl”) or substituted (a“substituted alkyl”) with one or more substituents (e.g., halogen, such as F).
  • substituents e.g., halogen, such as F
  • the alkyl group is an unsubstituted C 1-10 alkyl (such as unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl, e.g., ⁇ CH 3 (Me), unsubstituted ethyl (Et), unsubstituted propyl (Pr, e.g., unsubstituted n-propyl (n-Pr), unsubstituted isopropyl (i-Pr)), unsubstituted butyl (Bu, e.g., unsubstituted n-butyl (n-Bu), unsubstituted tert-butyl (tert-Bu or t-Bu), unsubstituted sec-butyl (sec-Bu), unsubstituted isobutyl (i-Bu)).
  • the alkyl group is a substituted C 1-10 alkyl (such as substituted C 1-6 alkyl, e.g., ⁇ CH 3 (Me), un
  • heteroalkyl refers to an alkyl group, which further includes at least one heteroatom (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms) selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur within (i.e., inserted between adjacent carbon atoms of) and/or placed at one or more terminal position(s) of the parent chain.
  • a heteroalkyl group refers to a saturated group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-10 alkyl”).
  • a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain
  • heteroC 1-9 alkyl (“heteroC 1-9 alkyl”).
  • a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-8 alkyl”).
  • a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-7 alkyl”).
  • a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-6 alkyl”).
  • a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-5 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-4 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-3 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC 1-2 alkyl”).
  • a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 carbon atom and 1 heteroatom (“heteroC 1 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-6 alkyl”). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroalkyl”) or substituted (a“substituted heteroalkyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain
  • the heteroalkyl group is an unsubstituted heteroC 1-10 alkyl. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkyl group is a substituted heteroC 1-10 alkyl.
  • alkenyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 double bonds).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms (“C 2-9 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 2-8 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms (“C 2-7 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2-6 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 2-5 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C 2-4 alkenyl”). In some
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 2-3 alkenyl”). In some
  • an alkenyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C 2 alkenyl”).
  • the one or more carbon- carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl).
  • Examples of C 2-4 alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C 2 ), 1-propenyl (C 3 ), 2-propenyl (C 3 ), 1- butenyl (C 4 ), 2-butenyl (C 4 ), butadienyl (C 4 ), and the like.
  • C 2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C 2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C 5 ), pentadienyl (C 5 ), hexenyl (C 6 ), and the like. Additional examples of alkenyl include heptenyl (C 7 ), octenyl (C 8 ), octatrienyl (C 8 ), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkenyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted alkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkenyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • heteroalkenyl refers to an alkenyl group, which further includes at least one heteroatom (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms) selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur within (i.e., inserted between adjacent carbon atoms of) and/or placed at one or more terminal position(s) of the parent chain.
  • a heteroalkenyl group refers to a group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-10 alkenyl”).
  • a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-9 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-8 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-7 alkenyl”).
  • a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-6 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-5 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-4 alkenyl”).
  • a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-3 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-6 alkenyl”). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroalkenyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroalkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroalkenyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkenyl group is an unsubstituted heteroC 2-10 alkenyl. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkenyl group is a substituted heteroC 2-10 alkenyl.
  • alkynyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 triple bonds) (“C 2-10 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms (“C 2-9 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 2-8 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms (“C 2- 7 alkynyl”).
  • an alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2-6 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 2-5 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C 2-4 alkynyl”). In some
  • an alkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 2-3 alkynyl”). In some
  • an alkynyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C 2 alkynyl”).
  • the one or more carbon- carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butynyl).
  • Examples of C 2-4 alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl (C 2 ), 1-propynyl (C 3 ), 2- propynyl (C 3 ), 1-butynyl (C 4 ), 2-butynyl (C 4 ), and the like.
  • Examples of C 2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C 2-4 alkynyl groups as well as pentynyl (C 5 ), hexynyl (C 6 ), and the like.
  • alkynyl examples include heptynyl (C 7 ), octynyl (C 8 ), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkynyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted alkynyl”) or substituted (a“substituted alkynyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is an unsubstituted C 2-10 alkynyl. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is a substituted C 2-10 alkynyl.
  • heteroalkynyl refers to an alkynyl group, which further includes at least one heteroatom (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms) selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur within (i.e., inserted between adjacent carbon atoms of) and/or placed at one or more terminal position(s) of the parent chain.
  • a heteroalkynyl group refers to a group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-10 alkynyl”).
  • a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-9 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2- 8 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-7 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-6 alkynyl”). In some
  • a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-5 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-4 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-3 alkynyl”).
  • a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC 2-6 alkynyl”). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroalkynyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroalkynyl”) or substituted (a“substituted
  • heteroalkynyl with one or more substituents.
  • the heteroalkynyl group is an unsubstituted heteroC 2-10 alkynyl. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkynyl group is a substituted heteroC 2-10 alkynyl.
  • carbocyclyl or“carbocyclic” refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 14 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-14 carbocyclyl”) and zero heteroatoms in the non-aromatic ring system.
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-10 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-8 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 7 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-7 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 4 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 4-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 5-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 5-10 carbocyclyl”).
  • Exemplary C 3-6 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C 3 ), cyclopropenyl (C 3 ), cyclobutyl (C 4 ), cyclobutenyl (C 4 ), cyclopentyl (C 5 ), cyclopentenyl (C 5 ), cyclohexyl (C 6 ), cyclohexenyl (C 6 ), cyclohexadienyl (C 6 ), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3-8 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3-6 carbocyclyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C 7 ), cycloheptenyl (C 7 ), cycloheptadienyl (C 7 ), cycloheptatrienyl (C 7 ), cyclooctyl (C 8 ), cyclooctenyl (C 8 ), bicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl (C 7 ), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (C 8 ), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3-10 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3-8 carbocyclyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C 9 ), cyclononenyl (C 9 ), cyclodecyl (C 10 ), cyclodecenyl (C 10 ), octahydro-1H-indenyl (C 9 ), decahydronaphthalenyl (C 10 ),
  • the carbocyclyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic carbocyclyl”) or polycyclic (e.g., containing a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic carbocyclyl”) or tricyclic system (“tricyclic carbocyclyl”)) and can be saturated or can contain one or more carbon-carbon double or triple bonds.
  • “Carbocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the carbocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the carbocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the carbocyclic ring system.
  • each instance of a carbocyclyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted carbocyclyl”) or substituted (a“substituted carbocyclyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the carbocyclyl group is an unsubstituted C 3-14 carbocyclyl.
  • the carbocyclyl group is a substituted C 3-14 carbocyclyl.
  • “carbocyclyl” is a monocyclic, saturated carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 14 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-14 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-10 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-8 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-6 cycloalkyl”).
  • a cycloalkyl group has 4 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 4-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 5-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 5-10 cycloalkyl”). Examples of C 5-6 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl (C 5 ) and cyclohexyl (C 5 ).
  • C 3-6 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C 5-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclopropyl (C 3 ) and cyclobutyl (C 4 ).
  • Examples of C 3-8 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C 3-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C 7 ) and cyclooctyl (C 8 ).
  • each instance of a cycloalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted cycloalkyl”) or substituted (a“substituted cycloalkyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the cycloalkyl group is an unsubstituted C 3-14 cycloalkyl. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is a substituted C 3-14 cycloalkyl.
  • the term“heterocyclyl” or“heterocyclic” refers to a radical of a 3- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“3-14 membered heterocyclyl”). In heterocyclyl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • a heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic (“monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or polycyclic (e.g., a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic heterocyclyl”) or tricyclic system (“tricyclic heterocyclyl”)), and can be saturated or can contain one or more carbon- carbon double or triple bonds.
  • Heterocyclyl polycyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.“Heterocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system.
  • each instance of heterocyclyl is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heterocyclyl”) or substituted (a“substituted heterocyclyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the heterocyclyl group is an unsubstituted 3-14 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is a substituted 3-14 membered heterocyclyl.
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, and thiiranyl.
  • Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, and thietanyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl, and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxathiolanyl and dithiolanyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 3 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, and dioxanyl.
  • heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl.
  • Exemplary 7-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl.
  • Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl.
  • Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclyl groups include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl,
  • aryl refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10, or 14 pi electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system (“C 6-14 aryl”).
  • aromatic ring system e.g., having 6, 10, or 14 pi electrons shared in a cyclic array
  • an aryl group has 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 6 aryl”; e.g., phenyl).
  • an aryl group has 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 10 aryl”; e.g., naphthyl such as 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl).
  • an aryl group has 14 ring carbon atoms (“C 14 aryl”; e.g., anthracyl).“Aryl” also includes ring systems wherein the aryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the aryl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbon atoms continue to designate the number of carbon atoms in the aryl ring system.
  • each instance of an aryl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted aryl”) or substituted (a“substituted aryl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the aryl group is an unsubstituted C 6-14 aryl. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is a substituted C 6-14 aryl.
  • heteroaryl refers to a radical of a 5-14 membered monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic, tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10, or 14 pi electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-14 membered heteroaryl”).
  • the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • Heteroaryl polycyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.“Heteroaryl” includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heteroaryl ring system.
  • Heteroaryl also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused polycyclic (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system.
  • Polycyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom e.g., indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like
  • the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g., 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., 5-indolyl).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heteroaryl”).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heteroaryl”).
  • the 5- 6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • each instance of a heteroaryl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroaryl”) or substituted (a“substituted heteroaryl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the heteroaryl group is an unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.
  • the heteroaryl group is a substituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl, and thiophenyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 3 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 4 heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing 3 or 4 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively.
  • Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl.
  • Exemplary 5,6- bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl,
  • Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl.
  • Exemplary tricyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, phenanthridinyl, dibenzofuranyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, and phenazinyl.
  • “Heteroaralkyl” is a subset of“alkyl” and refers to an alkyl group substituted by a heteroaryl group, wherein the point of attachment is on the alkyl moiety.
  • “unsaturated bond” refers to a double or triple bond.
  • saturated refers to a moiety that does not contain a double or triple bond, i.e., the moiety only contains single bonds.
  • alkylene is the divalent moiety of alkyl
  • alkenylene is the divalent moiety of alkenyl
  • alkynylene is the divalent moiety of alkynyl
  • heteroalkylene is the divalent moiety of heteroalkyl
  • heteroalkenylene is the divalent moiety of heteroalkenyl
  • heteroalkynylene is the divalent moiety of heteroalkynyl
  • carbocyclylene is the divalent moiety of carbocyclyl
  • heterocyclylene is the divalent moiety of heterocyclyl
  • arylene is the divalent moiety of aryl
  • heteroarylene is the divalent moiety of heteroaryl.
  • a group is optionally substituted unless expressly provided otherwise.
  • the term “optionally substituted” refers to being substituted or unsubstituted.
  • alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted.
  • “Optionally substituted” refers to a group which may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g.,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” alkyl, “substituted” or“unsubstituted” alkenyl,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” alkynyl, “substituted” or“unsubstituted” heteroalkyl,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” heteroalkenyl, “substituted” or“unsubstituted”
  • the term“substituted” means that at least one hydrogen present on a group is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g., a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction.
  • a“substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position.
  • substituted is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, and includes any of the substituents described herein that results in the formation of a stable compound.
  • the present invention contemplates any and all such combinations in order to arrive at a stable compound.
  • heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety.
  • the invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the exemplary substituents described herein.
  • Exemplary carbon atom substituents include, but are not limited to, halogen, ⁇ CN, ⁇ NO 2 , ⁇ N 3 , ⁇ SO 2 H, ⁇ SO 3 H, ⁇ OH, ⁇ OR aa , ⁇ ON(R bb ) 2 , ⁇ N(R bb ) 2 , ⁇ N(R bb ) +
  • R aa is, independently, selected from C 1-10 alkyl, C 1-10 perhaloalkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-10 alkynyl, heteroC 1-10 alkyl, heteroC 2-10 alkenyl, heteroC 2-10 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R aa groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alken
  • each instance of R cc is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C 1-10 alkyl, C 1-10 perhaloalkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-10 alkynyl, heteroC 1-10 alkyl, heteroC 2-10 alkenyl, heteroC 2-10 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R cc groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R dd groups;
  • each instance of R dd is, independently, selected from halogen, ⁇ CN, ⁇ NO 2 , ⁇ N 3 , ⁇ SO 2 H, ⁇ SO 3 H, ⁇ OH, ⁇ OR ee , ⁇ ON(R ff ) 2 , ⁇ N(R ff ) 2 , ⁇ N(R ff ) +
  • each instance of R ee is, independently, selected from C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 perhaloalkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, heteroC 1-6 alkyl, heteroC 2-6 alkenyl, heteroC 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, C 6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R gg groups;
  • each instance of R ff is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 perhaloalkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, heteroC 1-6 alkyl, heteroC 2-6 alkenyl, heteroC 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-10 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two R ff groups are joined to form a 3-10 membered heterocyclyl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R gg groups; and
  • each instance of R gg is, independently, halogen, ⁇ CN, ⁇ NO 2 , ⁇ N 3 , ⁇ SO 2 H, ⁇ SO 3 H, ⁇ OH, ⁇ OC +
  • carbon atom substituents include: halogen, ⁇ CN, ⁇ NO 2 , ⁇ N 3 , ⁇ SO 2 H, ⁇ SO 3 H, ⁇ OH, ⁇ OC 1-6 alkyl, ⁇ ON(C 1-6 alkyl) 2 , ⁇ N(C 1-6 alkyl) 2 , ⁇ N(C 1-6 alkyl) +
  • halo or“halogen” refers to fluorine (fluoro, ⁇ F), chlorine (chloro, ⁇ Cl), bromine (bromo, ⁇ Br), or iodine (iodo, ⁇ I).
  • hydroxyl refers to the group ⁇ OH.
  • amino refers to the group ⁇ NH 2 .
  • substituted amino by extension, refers to a monosubstituted amino, a disubstituted amino, or a trisubstituted amino. In certain embodiments, the“substituted amino” is a monosubstituted amino or a
  • trisubstituted amino refers to an amino group wherein the nitrogen atom directly attached to the parent molecule is substituted with three groups, and includes groups selected from ⁇ N(R bb ) 3 and ⁇ N(R bb ) +
  • sulfonyl refers to a group selected from–SO 2 N(R bb ) 2 ,–SO 2 R aa , and– SO 2 OR aa , wherein R aa and R bb are as defined herein.
  • heteroaryloxy aliphaticthioxy, heteroaliphaticthioxy, alkylthioxy, heteroalkylthioxy, arylthioxy, heteroarylthioxy, mono- or di- aliphaticamino, mono- or di- heteroaliphaticamino, mono- or di- alkylamino, mono- or di- heteroalkylamino, mono- or di-arylamino, or mono- or di-heteroarylamino; or two R X1 groups taken together form a 5- to 6-membered heterocyclic ring.
  • acyl groups include aldehydes ( ⁇ CHO), carboxylic acids ( ⁇ CO 2 H), ketones, acyl halides, esters, amides, imines, carbonates, carbamates, and ureas.
  • Acyl substituents include, but are not limited to, any of the substituents described herein, that result in the formation of a stable moiety (e.g., aliphatic, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroaliphatic, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl, oxo, imino, thiooxo, cyano, isocyano, amino, azido, nitro, hydroxyl, thiol, halo, aliphaticamino, heteroaliphaticamino, alkylamino, heteroalkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, aliphaticoxy, heteroaliphaticoxy, alkyl
  • sil refers to the group–Si(R aa ) 3 , wherein R aa is as defined herein.
  • Nitrogen atoms can be substituted or unsubstituted as valency permits, and include primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary nitrogen atoms.
  • the substituent present on the nitrogen atom is an nitrogen protecting group (also referred to herein as an“amino protecting group”).
  • heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R dd groups, and wherein R aa , R bb , R cc , and R dd are as defined herein.
  • Nitrogen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Nitrogen protecting groups such as carbamate groups include, but are not limited to, methyl carbamate, ethyl carbamate, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate (Fmoc), 9-(2-sulfo)fluorenylmethyl carbamate, 9-(2,7-dibromo)fluoroenylmethyl carbamate, 2,7-di-t- butyl-[9-(10,10-dioxo-10,10,10,10-tetrahydrothioxanthyl)]methyl carbamate (DBD-Tmoc), 4-methoxyphenacyl carbamate (Phenoc), 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbamate (Troc), 2- trimethylsilylethyl carbamate (Teoc), 2-phenylethyl carbamate (hZ), 1-(1-adamantyl)-1- methylethyl
  • TLBOC 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethyl carbamate (Bpoc), 1-(3,5-di-t-butylphenyl)-1- methylethyl carbamate (t-Bumeoc), 2-(2′- and 4′-pyridyl)ethyl carbamate (Pyoc), 2-(N,N- dicyclohexylcarboxamido)ethyl carbamate, t-butyl carbamate (BOC or Boc), 1-adamantyl carbamate (Adoc), vinyl carbamate (Voc), allyl carbamate (Alloc), 1-isopropylallyl carbamate (Ipaoc), cinnamyl carbamate (Coc), 4-nitrocinnamyl carbamate (Noc), 8-quinolyl carbamate, N-hydroxypiperidinyl carbamate, alkyldithio carbamate, benzyl carbamate (C
  • Nitrogen protecting groups such as sulfonamide groups include, but are not limited to, p-toluenesulfonamide (Ts), benzenesulfonamide, 2,3,6-trimethyl-4- methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtr), 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtb), 2,6- dimethyl-4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Pme), 2,3,5,6-tetramethyl-4- methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mte), 4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mbs), 2,4,6- trimethylbenzenesulfonamide (Mts), 2,6-dimethoxy-4-methylbenzenesulfonamide (iMds), 2,2,5,7,8-pentamethylchroman-6-sulfonamide (Pmc), methanesulfonamide
  • nitrogen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, phenothiazinyl-(10)- acyl derivative, N′-p-toluenesulfonylaminoacyl derivative, N′-phenylaminothioacyl derivative, N-benzoylphenylalanyl derivative, N-acetylmethionine derivative, 4,5-diphenyl-3- oxazolin-2-one, N-phthalimide, N-dithiasuccinimide (Dts), N-2,3-diphenylmaleimide, N-2,5- dimethylpyrrole, N-1,1,4,4-tetramethyldisilylazacyclopentane adduct (STABASE), 5- substituted 1,3-dimethyl-1,3,5-triazacyclohexan-2-one, 5-substituted 1,3-dibenzyl-1,3,5- triazacyclohexan-2-one, 1-substituted 3,5-di
  • diphenylthiophosphinamide Ppt
  • dialkyl phosphoramidates dibenzyl phosphoramidate, diphenyl phosphoramidate
  • benzenesulfenamide o-nitrobenzenesulfenamide
  • Nps 2,4- dinitrobenzenesulfenamide
  • pentachlorobenzenesulfenamide 2-nitro-4- methoxybenzenesulfenamide
  • triphenylmethylsulfenamide triphenylmethylsulfenamide
  • 3-nitropyridinesulfenamide Npys
  • a nitrogen protecting group is benzyl (Bn), tert- butyloxycarbonyl (BOC), carbobenzyloxy (Cbz), 9-flurenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), trifluoroacetyl, triphenylmethyl, acetyl (Ac), benzoyl (Bz), p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), 3,4- dimethoxybenzyl (DMPM), p-methoxyphenyl (PMP), 2,2,2-trichloroethyloxycarbonyl (Troc), triphenylmethyl (Tr), tosyl (Ts), brosyl (Bs), nosyl (Ns), mesyl (Ms), triflyl (Tf), or dansyl (Ds).
  • Bn benzyl
  • BOC tert- butyloxycarbonyl
  • Cbz carbobenzyloxy
  • Fmoc 9-flurenylmethyloxycarbony
  • the substituent present on an oxygen atom is an oxygen protecting group (also referred to herein as an“hydroxyl protecting group”).
  • Oxygen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, methoxylmethyl (MOM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), t-butylthiomethyl,
  • DEIPS diethylisopropylsilyl
  • TDMS t-butyldimethylsilyl
  • TDPS t- butyldiphenylsilyl
  • tribenzylsilyl tri-p-xylylsilyl, triphenylsilyl
  • DPMS diphenylmethylsilyl
  • TMPS t-butylmethoxyphenylsilyl
  • formate benzoylformate, acetate, chloroacetate, dichloroacetate, trichloroacetate, trifluoroacetate, methoxyacetate, triphenylmethoxyacetate, phenoxyacetate, p-chlorophenoxyacetate, 3-phenylpropionate, 4- oxopentanoate (levulinate), 4,4-(ethylenedithio)pentanoate (levulinoyldithioacetal), pivaloate, adamantoate, crotonate, 4-methoxycrotonate, benzoate, p-phenylbenzoate, 2,4,6- trimethylbenzoate (mesitoate), methyl carbonate, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbonate (Fmoc), ethyl carbonate, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbonate
  • an oxygen protecting group is silyl.
  • an oxygen protecting group is t-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS), t- butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), triisoproylsilyl (TIPS), triphenylsilyl (TPS), triethylsilyl (TES), trimethylsilyl (TMS), triisopropylsiloxymethyl (TOM), acetyl (Ac), benzoyl (Bz), allyl carbonate, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbonate (Troc), 2-trimethylsilylethyl carbonate,
  • methoxymethyl (MOM), 1-ethoxyethyl (EE), 2-methyoxy-2-propyl (MOP), 2,2,2- trichloroethoxyethyl, 2-methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), 2-trimethylsilylethoxymethyl (SEM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), tetrahydrofuranyl (THF), p- methoxyphenyl (PMP), triphenylmethyl (Tr), methoxytrityl (MMT), dimethoxytrityl (DMT), allyl, p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), t-butyl, benzyl (Bn), allyl, or pivaloyl (Piv).
  • the substituent present on a sulfur atom is a sulfur protecting group (also referred to as a“thiol protecting group”).
  • a sulfur protecting group is acetamidomethyl, t-Bu, 3-nitro-2-pyridine sulfenyl, 2-pyridine-sulfenyl, or triphenylmethyl.
  • A“counterion” or“anionic counterion” is a negatively charged group associated with a positively charged group in order to maintain electronic neutrality.
  • An anionic counterion may be monovalent (i.e., including one formal negative charge).
  • An anionic counterion may also be multivalent (i.e., including more than one formal negative charge), such as divalent or trivalent.
  • Exemplary counterions include halide ions (e.g., F – , Cl – , Br – , I – ), NO –
  • sulfonate ions e.g., methansulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, p– toluenesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, 10–camphor sulfonate, naphthalene–2–sulfonate, naphthalene–1–sulfonic acid–5–sulfonate, ethan–1–sulfonic acid–2–sulfonate, and the like), carboxylate ions (e.g., acetate, propanoate, benzoate, glycerate, lactate, tartrate, glycolate, gluconate, and the like), BF ⁇
  • carborane anions e.g., CB 11 H –
  • Exemplary counterions which may be multivalent include CO 2 ⁇ 3 ⁇
  • carboxylate anions e.g., tartrate, citrate, fumarate, maleate, malate, malonate, gluconate, succinate, glutarate, adipate, pimelate, suberate, azelate, sebacate, salicylate, phthalates, aspartate, glutamate, and the like
  • carboxylate anions e.g., tartrate, citrate, fumarate, maleate, malate, malonate, gluconate, succinate, glutarate, adipate, pimelate, suberate, azelate, sebacate, salicylate, phthalates, aspartate, glutamate, and the like
  • carboranes e.g., tartrate, citrate, fumarate, maleate, malate, malonate, gluconate, succinate, glutarate, adipate, pimelate, suberate, azelate, sebacate, salicylate, phthalates, aspartate, glutamate, and the
  • phrase“at least one instance” refers to 1, 2, 3, 4, or more instances, but also encompasses a range, e.g., for example, from 1 to 4, from 1 to 3, from 1 to 2, from 2 to 4, from 2 to 3, or from 3 to 4 instances, inclusive.
  • carbohydrate or“saccharide” refers to an aldehydic or ketonic derivative of polyhydric alcohols.
  • Carbohydrates include compounds with relatively small molecules (e.g., sugars) as well as macromolecular or polymeric substances (e.g., starch, glycogen, and cellulose polysaccharides).
  • saccharide refers to monosaccharides, disaccharides, or polysaccharides. Monosaccharides are the simplest carbohydrates in that they cannot be hydrolyzed to smaller carbohydrates.
  • monosaccharides can be represented by the general formula C y H 2y O y (e.g., C 6 H 12 O 6 (a hexose such as glucose)), wherein y is an integer equal to or greater than 3.
  • C y H 2y O y e.g., C 6 H 12 O 6 (a hexose such as glucose)
  • y is an integer equal to or greater than 3.
  • Certain polyhydric alcohols not represented by the general formula described above may also be considered monosaccharides.
  • deoxyribose is of the formula C 5 H 10 O 4 and is a monosaccharide.
  • Monosaccharides usually consist of five or six carbon atoms and are referred to as pentoses and hexoses, receptively.
  • monosaccharide contains an aldehyde it is referred to as an aldose; and if it contains a ketone, it is referred to as a ketose.
  • Monosaccharides may also consist of three, four, or seven carbon atoms in an aldose or ketose form and are referred to as trioses, tetroses, and heptoses, respectively.
  • aldotriose and ketotriose sugars are considered to be aldotriose and ketotriose sugars, respectively.
  • aldotetrose sugars include erythrose and threose; and ketotetrose sugars include erythrulose.
  • Aldopentose sugars include ribose, arabinose, xylose, and lyxose; and ketopentose sugars include ribulose, arabulose, xylulose, and lyxulose.
  • aldohexose sugars include glucose (for example, dextrose), mannose, galactose, allose, altrose, talose, gulose, and idose; and ketohexose sugars include fructose, psicose, sorbose, and tagatose.
  • Ketoheptose sugars include sedoheptulose. Each carbon atom of a
  • the aldohexose D -glucose for example, has the formula C 6 H 12 O 6 , of which all but two of its six carbons atoms are stereogenic, making D-glucose one of the 16 (i.e., 2 4 ) possible stereoisomers.
  • the assignment of D or L is made according to the orientation of the asymmetric carbon furthest from the carbonyl group: in a standard Fischer projection if the hydroxyl group is on the right the molecule is a D sugar, otherwise it is an L sugar.
  • the aldehyde or ketone group of a straight-chain monosaccharide will react reversibly with a hydroxyl group on a different carbon atom to form a hemiacetal or hemiketal, forming a heterocyclic ring with an oxygen bridge between two carbon atoms. Rings with five and six atoms are called furanose and pyranose forms, respectively, and exist in equilibrium with the straight-chain form.
  • the carbon atom containing the carbonyl oxygen becomes a stereogenic center with two possible configurations: the oxygen atom may take a position either above or below the plane of the ring.
  • the resulting possible pair of stereoisomers is called anomers.
  • an ⁇ anomer the ⁇ OH substituent on the anomeric carbon rests on the opposite side (trans) of the ring from the ⁇ CH 2 OH side branch.
  • the alternative form, in which the ⁇ CH 2 OH substituent and the anomeric hydroxyl are on the same side (cis) of the plane of the ring, is called a ⁇ anomer.
  • a carbohydrate including two or more joined monosaccharide units is called a disaccharide or polysaccharide (e.g., a trisaccharide), respectively.
  • Exemplary disaccharides include sucrose, lactulose, lactose, maltose, isomaltose, trehalose, cellobiose, xylobiose, laminaribiose, gentiobiose, mannobiose, melibiose, nigerose, or rutinose.
  • Exemplary trisaccharides include, but are not limited to, isomaltotriose, nigerotriose, maltotriose, melezitose, maltotriulose, raffinose, and kestose.
  • carbohydrate also includes other natural or synthetic stereoisomers of the carbohydrates described herein.
  • salt refers to any and all salts, and encompasses pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, Berge et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, and perchloric acid or with organic acids, such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid, or malonic acid or by using other methods known in the art such as ion exchange.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, and perchloric acid
  • organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid, or malonic acid or by using other methods known in the art such as ion exchange.
  • salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate,
  • salts derived from appropriate bases include alpha-1-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2- naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like.
  • Salts derived from appropriate bases include alpha-1-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanes
  • Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like.
  • Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, lower alkyl sulfonate, and aryl sulfonate.
  • solvent refers to a substance that dissolves one or more solutes, resulting in a solution.
  • a solvent may serve as a medium for any reaction or transformation described herein.
  • the solvent may dissolve one or more reactants or reagents in a reaction mixture.
  • the solvent may facilitate the mixing of one or more reagents or reactants in a reaction mixture.
  • the solvent may also serve to increase or decrease the rate of a reaction relative to the reaction in a different solvent.
  • Solvents can be polar or non-polar, protic or aprotic.
  • Common organic solvents useful in the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, acetone, acetonitrile, benzene, benzonitrile, 1-butanol, 2-butanone, butyl acetate, tert-butyl methyl ether, carbon disulfide carbon tetrachloride, chlorobenzene, 1-chlorobutane, chloroform, cyclohexane, cyclopentane, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, 1,2-dichloroethane, dichloromethane (DCM), N,N-dimethylacetamide N,N-dimethylformamide (DMF), 1,3- dimethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinone (DMPU), 1,4-dioxane, 1,3-dioxane, diethylether, 2-ethoxyethyl ether, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethylene glycol,
  • “Oxidant,”“oxidizing agent” or“chemical oxidant” refers to a chemical compound or substance that has the ability to oxidize another compound. Oxidation, as will be appreciated by one of skill in the art, is the loss of electrons– and an oxidizing agent is a chemical agent that removes electrons from another compound. In certain embodiments, the oxidant is a two- electron oxidant (i.e., removed two electrons from the other compound). Examples of chemical oxidants can be found in the literature, e.g., Carey and Sundberg. Advanced
  • small molecule refers to molecules, whether naturally-occurring or artificially created (e.g., via chemical synthesis) that have a relatively low molecular weight.
  • a small molecule is an organic compound (i.e., it contains carbon).
  • the small molecule may contain multiple carbon-carbon bonds, stereocenters, and other functional groups (e.g., amines, hydroxyl, carbonyls, and heterocyclic rings, etc.).
  • functional groups e.g., amines, hydroxyl, carbonyls, and heterocyclic rings, etc.
  • the molecular weight of a small molecule is not more than about 1,000 g/mol, not more than about 900 g/mol, not more than about 800 g/mol, not more than about 700 g/mol, not more than about 600 g/mol, not more than about 500 g/mol, not more than about 400 g/mol, not more than about 300 g/mol, not more than about 200 g/mol, or not more than about 100 g/mol.
  • the molecular weight of a small molecule is at least about 100 g/mol, at least about 200 g/mol, at least about 300 g/mol, at least about 400 g/mol, at least about 500 g/mol, at least about 600 g/mol, at least about 700 g/mol, at least about 800 g/mol, or at least about 900 g/mol, or at least about 1,000 g/mol. Combinations of the above ranges (e.g., at least about 200 g/mol and not more than about 500 g/mol) are also possible.
  • the small molecule is a therapeutically active agent such as a drug (e.g., a molecule approved by the U.S.
  • the small molecule may also be complexed with one or more metal atoms and/or metal ions.
  • the small molecule is also referred to as a “small organometallic molecule.”
  • Preferred small molecules are biologically active in that they produce a biological effect in animals, preferably mammals, more preferably humans. Small molecules include, but are not limited to, radionuclides and imaging agents.
  • the small molecule is a drug.
  • the drug is one that has already been deemed safe and effective for use in humans or animals by the appropriate governmental agency or regulatory body. For example, drugs approved for human use are listed by the FDA under 21 C.F.R.
  • A“large organic molecule” or“large molecule” refers to an organic compound that is not a small molecule.
  • the molecular weight of a large molecule is greater than about 2,000 g/mol, greater than about 3,000 g/mol, greater than about 4,000 g/mol, or greater than about 5,000 g/mol.
  • the molecular weight of a large molecule is at most about 100,000 g/mol, at most about 30,000 g/mol, at most about 10,000 g/mol, at most about 5,000 g/mol, or at most about 2,000 g/mol. Combinations of the above ranges (e.g., greater than about 2,000 g/mol and at most about 10,000 g/mol) are also possible.
  • the large molecule is a therapeutically active agent such as a drug (e.g., a molecule approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration as provided in the Code of Federal Regulations (C.F.R.)).
  • a drug e.g., a molecule approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration as provided in the Code of Federal Regulations (C.F.R.)
  • the large molecule may also be complexed with one or more metal atoms and/or metal ions.
  • the large molecule is also referred to as an“large organometallic compound.”
  • the invention provides a method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound (i.e., a glycosyl acceptor), the method comprising contacting a glycosyl donor with the hydroxyl-containing organic compound, in the presence of an oxidant, to yield a glycosylated organic compound.
  • a glycosyl donor i.e., a glycosyl acceptor
  • “glycosyl donors” useful in the provided methods are of the following formula:
  • each R is independently a substituent on the pyranose backbone.
  • each substituent on the sugar backbone is independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted hydroxyl, optionally substituted amino, or a carbohydrate.
  • R is hydrogen.
  • R is optionally substituted alkyl.
  • R is optionally substituted hydroxyl.
  • R is optionally substituted amino.
  • R is a carbohydrate (e.g., sugar or polysaccharide).
  • each substituent on the sugar backbone is independently–CH 2 OH,–CH 2 OBn,–OH,–OBn,–OBz,–OFmoc,–OTBS,–NPhth, –CO 2 Bn,–CH 3 ,–H, or a carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar).
  • Bn is aboutCH 2 Ph
  • Fmoc is 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate
  • TBS is tert-butyldimethylsilyl
  • NPhth is a phthalimide group.
  • the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
  • glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
  • the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
  • the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
  • the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
  • glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
  • the glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
  • the glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
  • A“glycosyl acceptor” is any hydroxyl-containing organic compound.
  • a hydroxyl- containing organic compound is any organic molecule comprising an–OH group.
  • a hydroxyl-containing organic compound is of the formula R 2 –OH, or a salt thereof, wherein R 2 is an organic compound.
  • R 2 is a small molecule.
  • R 2 is a large molecule.
  • R 2 is a carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar).
  • R 2 is a monosaccharide, disaccharide, trisaccharide, or polysaccharide.
  • the method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound comprises contacting a glycosyl donor provided herein, or a salt thereof, with a hydroxyl-containing organic compound of the formula R 2 –OH, or a salt thereof, in the presence of an oxidant to yield a compound of Formula (S-1):
  • each R is independently a substituent on the pyranose ring, as defined herein.
  • each substituent on the sugar backbone is independently–CH 2 OH,–CH 2 OBn,–OH,–OBn,–OBz,–OFmoc,–OTBS,–NPhth,– CO 2 Bn,–CH 3 ,–H, or another carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar).
  • the grou corres onding to:
  • the grou corres onding to:
  • the grou corres onding to:
  • the grou corres onding to:
  • the grou corres onding to:
  • the grou corres ondin to:
  • the“glycosyl acceptor” is a hydroxyl-containing organic molecule, and may be a hydroxyl-containing carbohydrate (e.g., sugar).
  • the glycosyl acceptor is a hydroxyl-containing monosaccharide
  • the product of the glycosylation is a disaccharide.
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
  • each substituent on the sugar backbone is independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted hydroxyl, optionally substituted amino, or a carbohydrate.
  • R is hydrogen.
  • R is optionally substituted alkyl.
  • R is optionally substituted hydroxyl.
  • R is optionally substituted amino.
  • R is a carbohydrate (e.g., sugar or polysaccharide).
  • each substituent on the sugar backbone is independently–CH 2 OH,–CH 2 OBn,–OH,–OBn,–OBz,–OFmoc,–OTBS,–NPhth, –CO 2 Bn,–CH 3 ,–H, or a carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar).
  • Bn is aboutCH 2 Ph
  • Fmoc is 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate
  • TBS is tert-butyldimethylsilyl
  • NPhth is a phthalimide group.
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
  • R 1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of the formula:
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
  • R 1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted alkyl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted aryl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted heterocyclyl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted carbocyclyl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted acyl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted phenyl. In certain embodiments, R 1 is substituted phenyl. In certain embodiments, R 1 is unsubstituted phenyl (i.e.,–Ph).
  • glycosyl acceptor is, in certain embodiments, of one of the following formulae:
  • the glcosl accetor is of one of the formula:
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of the formula:
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
  • the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
  • glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
  • the hydroxyl-containing organic compound of the formula R 2 –OH, or a salt thereof, and the glycosylation product is a compound of Formula (S-1):
  • each R is independently a substituent on the pyranose ring.
  • R 2 is of any one of the following formulae:
  • R 2 is of any one of the following formulae:
  • R 2 is of any one of the following formulae:
  • R 2 is of one of the following formulae:
  • R 2 is of one of the following formulae:
  • the methods provided herein comprise a step of glycosylating that is carried out in the presence of an oxidant.
  • the oxidant is a chemical oxidant (i.e., oxidizing agent).
  • the oxidant is a 2-electron oxidant.
  • the oxidant is ceric ammonium nitrate (CAN).
  • the oxidant is a hypervalent iodine reagent.
  • the oxidant is
  • the oxidant may be used in stoichiometric, substoichiometric, catalytic, or excess amounts. In certain embodiments, less than 1 molar equivalent of the oxidant is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, approximately 1 molar equivalent of the oxidant is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, more than 1 molar equivalent of the oxidant is used relative to the glycosyl donor (i.e., excess).
  • 1-2 molar equivalents e.g., about 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, or 1.9 molar equivalents
  • approximately 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, or 10 equivalents are used.
  • the step of glycosylating may be carried out in the presence of one or more additional agents.
  • the step of glycosylating is carried out in the presence of a Lewis acid.
  • the Lewis acid is a boron species.
  • the Lewis acid is boron trifluoride.
  • the Lewis acid is boron trifluoride diethyletherate (BF 3 •OEt 2 ).
  • the Lewis acid may be used in stoichiometric, substoichiometric, catalytic, or excess amounts. In certain embodiments, less than 1 molar equivalent of the Lewis acid is used relative to the glycosyl donor.
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of an oxidant and a Lewis acid.
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of an oxidant and BF 3 •OEt 2 . In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and a Lewis acid. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF 3 •OEt 2 . In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of approximately 1.1 equivalents of PIFA and 1 equivalent of BF 3 •OEt 2 . In certain
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF 3 •OEt 2 , in CH 2 Cl 2 and MeCN. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF 3 •OEt 2 , in CH 2 Cl 2 and MeCN, at room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of approximately 1.1 equivalents of PIFA and 1 equivalent of BF 3 •OEt 2 , in CH 2 Cl 2 and MeCN, at room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF 3 •OEt 2 , in CH 2 Cl 2 and MeCN, at room temperature, for 30 minutes or more. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of approximately 1.1 equivalents of PIFA and 1 equivalent of BF 3 •OEt 2 , in CH 2 Cl 2 and MeCN, at room temperature, for 30 minutes or more.
  • the step of glycosylating is carried out in a solvent.
  • the solvent may be any solvent, including polar and non-polar solvents.
  • the solvent is aprotic.
  • the solvent is a polar solvent.
  • the solvent is an alkyl nitrile.
  • the solvent is acetonitrile (MeCN).
  • the solvent is CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • the solvent is a mixture of CH 2 Cl 2 and MeCN.
  • the solvent is a mixture of CH 2 Cl 2 and MeCN (1/1).
  • the step of glycosylation can be carried out at any temperature.
  • the reaction is carried out at or around room temperature (about 21 °C).
  • the reaction is carried out at a temperature below room temperature.
  • the reaction is carried out at a temperature above room temperature.
  • the reaction is carried out at a temperature between 21 °C and 70 °C.
  • the reaction is carried out at or around 60 °C.
  • the methods described herein yield glycosylated organic molecules with anomeric selectivity.
  • “Anomeric selectivity” refers to the amount of one anomer formed in a reaction as compared to the amount of the opposite anomer formed in the reaction.“Anomers” are sugar stereoisomers that are isomeric with respect to the
  • Anomers are either alpha ( ⁇ ) or beta ( ⁇ ) anomers.
  • ⁇ and ⁇ anomeric forms are shown for compounds of Formula (S-1) below:
  • the step of glycosylating yields a glycosylated organic molecule (e.g., a compound of Formula (S-1)) in a ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio greater than 1:1.
  • the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 7:1, 8:1, 9:1, 10:1, 11:1, 12:1, 13:1, 14:1, 15:1, 16:1, 17:1, 18:1, 19:1, 20:1, 21:1, 22:1, 23:1, 24:1, 25:1, 30:1, 35:1, 40:1, 45:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, 80:1, 90:1, or 100:1.
  • the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 3:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 5:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 10:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 15:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 20:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 25:1.
  • the step of glycosylating yields a glycosylated organic molecule (e.g., a compound of Formula (S-1)) in a ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio greater than 1:1.
  • the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 7:1, 8:1, 9:1, 10:1, 11:1, 12:1, 13:1, 14:1, 15:1, 16:1, 17:1, 18:1, 19:1, 20:1, 21:1, 22:1, 23:1, 24:1, 25:1, 30:1, 35:1, 40:1, 45:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, 80:1, 90:1, or 100:1.
  • the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 3:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 5:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 10:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 15:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 20:1. In certain embodiments, the ⁇ : ⁇ anomeric ratio is greater than 25:1.
  • the glycosylated compound can be isolated in any chemical yield.
  • the compound is isolated in from 1-10%, 10-20% 20-30%, 30-40%, 40-50%, 50-60%, 60-70%, 70-80%, 80-90%, or 90-100% yield.
  • the compound is produced in approximately 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or 100% yield.
  • the product may be purified via one or more purification steps.
  • the product is purified by chromatography, extraction, filtration, precipitation, crystallization, or any other method known in the art.
  • the compound is carried forward to a subsequent synthetic step without purification (i.e., crude).
  • the glycosyl acceptor employed in the glycosylation reaction is a sugar that comprises a“latent glycosyl donor” moiety.
  • “latent glycosyl donor” moiety is a protected phenol moiety of the following formula:
  • “latent glycosyl donor” moiety is a protected phenol moiety of the following formula:
  • a method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound described herein further comprises the steps of:
  • step (b) contacting the compound provided in step (a) with a hydroxyl-containing organic compound (e.g., a compound of the formula R 2 –OH), or a salt thereof, in the presence of an oxidant, thereby glycosylating the hydroxyl organic compound.
  • a hydroxyl-containing organic compound e.g., a compound of the formula R 2 –OH
  • Step (b) above is a glycosylation reaction, and therefore any reagents or conditions described herein for a step of glycosylating may be used in this step.
  • any reagents or conditions may be used in the step of deprotecting.
  • the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of a nucleophile or base. In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of an alcohol. In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of hydroxide (e.g., NaOH, KOH, LiOH). In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of an alkoxide (e.g., methoxide, ethoxide). In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of ethanolamine. In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of sodium methoxide.
  • hydroxide e.g., NaOH, KOH, LiOH
  • an alkoxide e.g., methoxide, ethoxide
  • the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of ethanolamine. In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of sodium methoxide.
  • the step of deprotecting is carried out in a solvent.
  • the solvent may be any solvent, including polar and non-polar solvents.
  • the solvent is a polar solvent.
  • the solvent is an alcohol.
  • the solvent is methanol.
  • the solvent is THF.
  • the deprotection is carried out in the presence of ethanolamine. In certain embodiments, the deprotection is carried out in the presence of excess ethanolamine (i.e., greater than 1 equivalent). In certain embodiments, the
  • deprotection is carried out in the presence of excess ethanolamine in THF. In certain embodiments, the deprotection is carried out in the presence of excess ethanolamine, in THF, at around room temperature.
  • the step of deprotecting can be carried out at any temperature. In certain embodiments,
  • the reaction is carried out at or around room temperature (about 21 °C). In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature below room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature above room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature between 21 °C and 100 °C.
  • the deprotected product can be isolated in any chemical yield. In certain aspects,
  • the compound is isolated in from 1-10%, 10-20% 20-30%, 30-40%, 40-50%, 50-60%, 60-70%, 70-80%, 80-90%, or 90-100% yield.
  • the compound is produced in approximately 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or 100% yield.
  • the product may be purified via one or more purification steps.
  • the product is purified by chromatography, extraction, filtration, precipitation, crystallization, or any other method known in the art.
  • the compound is carried forward to a subsequent synthetic step without purification (i.e., crude).
  • any of the methods described herein may further comprise the steps of:
  • step (d) using the glycosyl acceptor produced in step (c) in a subsequent glycosylation reaction.
  • Any of the methods provided herein may further comprise any number of iterative glycosylating/deprotecting steps to provide a trisaccharide, polysaccharide, glycan, etc.
  • the method include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more iterations.
  • the present invention also provides compounds that are useful as glycosyl donors or glycosyl acceptors in the methods provided herein. Provided herein around compounds of the following formula:
  • the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • the provided compound is of the following formulae:
  • the provided compound is of the following formulae:
  • the present invention provides compound of the following formula:
  • the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • the present invention provides compounds the following formulae:
  • a provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • a provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • R 1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
  • the provided compound is of the following formula:
  • the provided compound is of the following formula:
  • the provided compound is of the following formulae:
  • the provided compound is of the formula:
  • the provided compound is of the formula:
  • the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
  • the provided compound is of the following formula:
  • the provided compound is of the following formula:
  • the provided compound is of the following formula:
  • the provided compound us of the following formula:
  • kits comprising one or more compounds provided herein; optionally one or more reagents provided herein; and optionally instructions for use.
  • the kit comprises one or more glycosyl donors, one or more glycosyl acceptors; optionally a chemical oxidant (e.g., PIFA); and optionally instructions for use.
  • PIFA chemical oxidant
  • An important feature of this invention is use of these compounds in an iterative process, capitalizing on the active/latent properties designed into the system.
  • the next goal was to use the 2-O-benzoyl reagent 48 with a free C6 hydroxyl group as acceptor (Scheme 8), since it contains a latent glycosyl donor (which can be uncovered after the removal of the phenolic benzoyl group).
  • Compound 48 was prepared from glucal 43. Acceptor 48 can react with 30 under the conditions established above (Scheme 4) followed by selective benzoyl deprotection with ethanolamine to yield 50 (Scheme 9; (a) PIFA, BF 3 •OEt 2 , CH 3 CN; (b) ethanolamine, THF). Note that 30 was prepared from 49 under these deacylation conditions. Simple two-step sequences will then sequentially add monosaccharides to the chain to build the linear carbohydrate. These types of iterative glycosylations are provided and described herein. Scheme 9
  • a set of common monosaccharide building blocks are needed to prepare both branched and linear glycan structures. It is important to have a protecting group strategy that is common to all reagents to allow them to be used in a mix-and-match approach.
  • the prevalent motif observed in carbohydrate oligomers is for each monosaccharide in the chain to have two or three points of attachment to the neighboring residues (one for terminal branches).
  • every building block needs to have four types of protecting groups: (1) anomeric protection; (2) protecting groups that will only be removed in a global deprotection step at the end of the sequence; (3) a single temporary protecting group; and (4) no protecting group– a free glycosyl acceptor.
  • Benzyl groups will be utilized to protect alcohols that will be revealed in the final step; Fmoc groups will be used to protect alcohols that will be immediately revealed after glycosylation to act as glycosyl acceptors to introduce branching; Free hydroxyl groups will be revealed directly before use in glycosylation reactions and will largely be protected as silyl ethers during preparation of the building blocks (Scheme 8).
  • Seeberger has used an informatics approach to identify the most common building blocks needed to access the largest majority of known mammalian glycans (Seeberger, P. H. “The Logic of Automated Glycan Assembly”, Acc. Chem. Res.2015, 48, 1450-1463; Werz, D. B.; Ranzinger, R.; Herget, S.; Adibekian, A.; Von der Lieth, C-W.; Seeberger, P. H. “Exploring the Structural Diversity of Mammalian Carbohydrates (‘Glycospace’) by Statistical Databank Analysis”, ACS Chem. Bio.2007, 2, 685-691; Adibekian, A.;
  • Table 3 shows a set of building blocks for use in the present invention, categorized by monosaccharide type. These molecules are latent donors and can be fed into the reaction as acceptors to be glycosylated at the free hydroxyl groups. It is to be understood that all of these compounds can be protected at the free hydroxyl group (with a hydroxyl protecting group) and treated with ethanolamine to produce the corresponding donor molecules.
  • the building blocks are broken up by monosaccharide and it can be seen that there are clearly more prevalent substitution patterns for some types than others.
  • OAr is OC 6 H 4 p- OBz.
  • the synthesis of 32a begins from the known phthalimide 56 (See, e.g., Ferrier, R. J.; Hay, R. W.; Vethaviyasar, N.“A potential versatile synthesis of Glycosides,” Carbohydr. Res.1973, 27, 55–61).
  • Oxidative deprotection and introduction of the hydroquinone using the trichloroacetimidate method should afford 60 (see, e.g., Komarova, B.S.; Orekhova, M.V.; Tsvetkov, Y.E.; Nifantiev, N.E. Is an acyl group at O-3 in glucosyl donors able to control ⁇ -stereoselectivity of glycosylation? The role of conformational mobility and the protecting group at O-6”, Carb. Res.2014, 384, 70-76.
  • the hydroquinone will be introduced using the Schmidt method followed by benzoylation of the phenolic hydroxyl group and deprotection of the TBS group using TBAF to provide the target molecule 53a (see, e.g., Schmidt, R. R.; Michel, J.“Facile Synthesis of ⁇ - and ⁇ -O-Glycosyl Imidates; Preparation of Glycosides and Disaccharides”, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed.1980, 19, 731–732).
  • TMS tetramethylsilane
  • CDCl3 7.26 ppm
  • Coupling constants (J) are reported in Hz.
  • Multiplicities are reported using the following abbreviations: s, singlet; d, doublet; t, triplet; q, quartet; p, pentet; m, multiplet; b, broad; Carbon-13 nuclear magnetic resonance ( 13 C NMR) spectra were recorded using a Varian Unity Inova 500 MHz at 125 MHz.
  • Scheme 9 shows examples of an iterative glycosylation/deprotection/glycosylation reacrtions to access polysaccharides. Another example of this is shown below in Scheme 15.
  • glycosyl donor 50 (0.058 mmol) and glycosyl acceptor 48 (0.064 mmol) in a mixture of CH 2 Cl 2 (0.5 mL) and CH 3 CN (0.5 mL) was added BF 3 .Et 2 O (0.058 mmol, 7 ⁇ L) followed by PIFA (0.064 mmol, 28 mg) in one portion at room temperature. After 1 hour, the mixture was quenched with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO 3 (2 mL) then diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (20 mL).
  • the invention encompasses all variations, combinations, and permutations in which one or more limitations, elements, clauses, and descriptive terms from one or more of the listed claims is introduced into another claim.
  • any claim that is dependent on another claim can be modified to include one or more limitations found in any other claim that is dependent on the same base claim.
  • elements are presented as lists, e.g., in Markush group format, each subgroup of the elements is also disclosed, and any element(s) can be removed from the group.
  • the invention, or aspects of the invention is/are referred to as comprising particular elements and/or features, certain embodiments of the invention or aspects of the invention consist, or consist essentially of, such elements and/or features. For purposes of simplicity, those embodiments have not been specifically set forth in haec verba herein.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Steroid Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The invention provides methods and regents for the glycosylation of organic molecules. In one aspect, the invention provides a method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound (i.e., a glycosyl acceptor) comprising contacting a glycosyl donor with the hydroxyl-containing organic compound, in the presence of an oxidant, to yield a glycosylated organic compound. In certain embodiments, the methods provided herein provide glycosylation products with high anomeric selectivity. The methods can be applied to the synthesis of disaccharides, trisaccharides, polysaccharides, glycans, etc. Also provided herein are compounds (e.g., glycosyl donors and acceptors) which are useful building blocks in the provided reactions.

Description

REAGENTS AND METHODS FOR GLYCOSYLATION RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] The present application claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) to U.S. provisional patent application, U.S.S.N.62/377,271, filed August 19, 2016, the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0002] The development of new chemistry to address problems in the preparation of important biomolecules has helped to greatly advance our understanding of biology and has significantly impacted our ability to treat human disease. While these advances have been applied to nucleosides and nucleotides (components of DNA and RNA) and peptides and proteins, an extremely important class of molecules, carbohydrates, has not seen the same advancements. The chemistry of carbohydrates, also known as saccharides, sugars, and glycans, has lagged far behind. The reasons for this are multifaceted, but have nothing to do with the importance of these molecules. All living cells have attached glycans, and these molecules modulate cell signaling, recognition, immunity, and inflammation with far reaching implications in the understanding and treatment of a large variety of health problems. Instead, the reasons are due to synthetic and analytical difficulties related to their stereochemically rich structures, but also to the technical difficulties in their preparation which involves multistep syntheses for each unit, instability of active glycosyl transfer reagents, and the need to use difficult reagents to handle combined with aqueous sensitivity hampered by challenging physical properties of the reagents. These issues have hindered the availability of ready-to-use building blocks that has contributed to limited work by the synthetic community and generally relegated the area to a group of highly specialized scientists. These issues are summarized in the National Research Council’s report, “Transforming Glycoscience, A Roadmap for the Future” (2012, National Academy Press, Washington). SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0003] The present invention provides systems, methods, and regents for the glycosylation of organic molecules and/or the synthesis of more complex carbohydrates. In one aspect, the invention provides methods for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound (i.e., a glycosyl acceptor) comprising contacting a glycosyl donor with the hydroxyl-containing organic compound (i.e., the glycosyl acceptor), in the presence of an oxidant, to yield a glycosylated organic compound.
[0004] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is a compound of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000003_0001
or a salt thereof.
[0005] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000003_0002
[0006] Glycosyl acceptors useful in the methods provided herein are any compounds comprising a free hydroxyl group (i.e.,–OH group). The compound comprising a free hydroxyl group may be a small molecule, large molecule, natural product, pharmaceutical drug, etc. The compound containing a free hydroxyl group may also be a carbohydrate (e.g., monosaccharide, disaccharide, trisaccharide, polysaccharide). For example, sugars comprising free hydroxyl groups can be glycosyl acceptors, such as (but not limited to) compounds of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000004_0001
and salts thereof, wherein:
R1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
[0007] For example, in certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is the following:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000004_0002
[0008] Scheme 1 shows a general outline of a certain embodiment of the methods provided herein. The reaction of reagents such as 9 (a glycosyl donor; stereochemistry arbitrarily drawn as glucose as an example) and 10 (glycosyl acceptor; stereochemistry arbitrarily drawn as glucose as an example), provide the disaccharide 11, now containing a“latent glycosyl donor” moiety. In Scheme 1, Pg is any hydroxyl protecting group, defined herein. The method can further comprise a step of deprotecting the latent glycosyl donor moiety to unveil an active glycosyl donor, which can be used in a subsequent glycosylation step. For example, deprotection of the phenolic ester in 11 (Scheme 1) can be accomplished to reveal 13, and repeating the steps with a glycosyl acceptor such as 10, or other building blocks, would build up the saccharide. The methods described herein offer the ability to grow the carbohydrate in multiple directions as needed. The ability to form linear or branched substrates relies on tactical protecting group strategies (described herein). Additionally, protecting group choices can allow for predictable substrate control of anomeric selectivity, which is important in carbohydrate synthesis.
Figure imgf000005_0001
[0009] Additionally, the present invention provides compounds (e.g., glycosyl donors and glycosyl acceptors), and salts thereof, which are useful in glycosylation reactions and in carbohydrate preparation. In another aspect, the present invention provides kits comprising one or more of the compounds provided herein. [0010] The details of certain embodiments of the invention are set forth in the Detailed Description of Certain Embodiments, as described below. Other features, objects, and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the Definitions, Examples, and Claims. DEFINITIONS
[0011] Definitions of specific functional groups and chemical terms are described in more detail below. The chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed., inside cover, and specific functional groups are generally defined as described therein. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry, as well as specific functional moieties and reactivity, are described in Organic Chemistry, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito, 1999; Smith and March, March’s Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2001; Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers, Inc., New York, 1989; and Carruthers, Some Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1987.
[0012] Compounds described herein can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various stereoisomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers. For example, the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer. Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques et al., Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions (Wiley Interscience, New York, 1981); Wilen et al., Tetrahedron 33:2725 (1977); Eliel, E.L. Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds (McGraw-Hill, NY, 1962); and Wilen, S.H., Tables of Resolving Agents and Optical Resolutions p.268 (E.L. Eliel, Ed., Univ. of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, IN 1972). The invention additionally encompasses compounds as individual isomers substantially free of other isomers, and alternatively, as mixtures of various isomers.
[0013] In a formula, is a single bond where the stereochemistry of the moieties immediately attached thereto is not specified, is absent or a single bond, and or is a single or double bond. When an atom or formula is drawn with no stereochemistry specified, it is to be understood that the formula is meant to encompass all possible stereoisomers (e.g., enantiomers, diastereomers, epimers) of the compounds. [0014] Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, replacement of 19F with 18F, or the replacement of 12C with 13C or 14C are within the scope of the disclosure. Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays.
[0015] When a range of values is listed, it is intended to encompass each value and sub-range within the range. For example“C1-6 alkyl” is intended to encompass, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C1-6, C1-5, C1-4, C1-3, C1-2, C2-6, C2-5, C2-4, C2-3, C3-6, C3-5, C3-4, C4-6, C4-5, and C5-6 alkyl.
[0016] The term“aliphatic” refers to alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and carbocyclic groups.
Likewise, the term“heteroaliphatic” refers to heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, and heterocyclic groups.
[0017] The term“alkyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“C1-10 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 9 carbon atoms (“C1-9 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C1-8 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 7 carbon atoms (“C1-7 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C1-6 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“C1-5 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C1-4 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C1-3 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C1-2 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 carbon atom (“C1 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-6 alkyl”). Examples of C1-6 alkyl groups include methyl (C1), ethyl (C2), propyl (C3) (e.g., n-propyl, isopropyl), butyl (C4) (e.g., n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl), pentyl (C5) (e.g., n-pentyl, 3-pentanyl, amyl, neopentyl, 3-methyl-2-butanyl, tertiary amyl), and hexyl (C6) (e.g., n-hexyl). Additional examples of alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C7), n- octyl (C8), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted alkyl”) or substituted (a“substituted alkyl”) with one or more substituents (e.g., halogen, such as F). In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is an unsubstituted C1-10 alkyl (such as unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, e.g.,−CH3 (Me), unsubstituted ethyl (Et), unsubstituted propyl (Pr, e.g., unsubstituted n-propyl (n-Pr), unsubstituted isopropyl (i-Pr)), unsubstituted butyl (Bu, e.g., unsubstituted n-butyl (n-Bu), unsubstituted tert-butyl (tert-Bu or t-Bu), unsubstituted sec-butyl (sec-Bu), unsubstituted isobutyl (i-Bu)). In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is a substituted C1-10 alkyl (such as substituted C1-6 alkyl, e.g.,−CF3, Bn).
[0018] The term“heteroalkyl” refers to an alkyl group, which further includes at least one heteroatom (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms) selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur within (i.e., inserted between adjacent carbon atoms of) and/or placed at one or more terminal position(s) of the parent chain. In certain embodiments, a heteroalkyl group refers to a saturated group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC1-10 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain
(“heteroC1-9 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC1-8 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC1-7 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC1-6 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC1-5 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC1-4 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC1-3 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC1-2 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 1 carbon atom and 1 heteroatom (“heteroC1 alkyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl group is a saturated group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-6 alkyl”). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroalkyl”) or substituted (a“substituted heteroalkyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain
embodiments, the heteroalkyl group is an unsubstituted heteroC1-10 alkyl. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkyl group is a substituted heteroC1-10 alkyl.
[0019] The term“alkenyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 double bonds). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms (“C2-9 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C2-8 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms (“C2-7 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-6 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C2-5 alkenyl”). In some
embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C2-4 alkenyl”). In some
embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-3 alkenyl”). In some
embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C2 alkenyl”). The one or more carbon- carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl). Examples of C2-4 alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C2), 1-propenyl (C3), 2-propenyl (C3), 1- butenyl (C4), 2-butenyl (C4), butadienyl (C4), and the like. Examples of C2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C5), pentadienyl (C5), hexenyl (C6), and the like. Additional examples of alkenyl include heptenyl (C7), octenyl (C8), octatrienyl (C8), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkenyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted alkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkenyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is an unsubstituted C2-10 alkenyl. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is a substituted C2-10 alkenyl. In an alkenyl group, a C=C double bond for which the stereochemistry is not specified (e.g.,−CH=CHCH3 or ) may be an (E)- or (Z)- double bond.
[0020] The term“heteroalkenyl” refers to an alkenyl group, which further includes at least one heteroatom (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms) selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur within (i.e., inserted between adjacent carbon atoms of) and/or placed at one or more terminal position(s) of the parent chain. In certain embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group refers to a group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-10 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-9 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-8 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-7 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-6 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-5 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-4 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC2-3 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one double bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-6 alkenyl”). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroalkenyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroalkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroalkenyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkenyl group is an unsubstituted heteroC2-10 alkenyl. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkenyl group is a substituted heteroC2-10 alkenyl.
[0021] The term“alkynyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 triple bonds) (“C2-10 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms (“C2-9 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C2-8 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms (“C2- 7 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-6 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C2-5 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C2-4 alkynyl”). In some
embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-3 alkynyl”). In some
embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C2 alkynyl”). The one or more carbon- carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butynyl). Examples of C2-4 alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl (C2), 1-propynyl (C3), 2- propynyl (C3), 1-butynyl (C4), 2-butynyl (C4), and the like. Examples of C2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkynyl groups as well as pentynyl (C5), hexynyl (C6), and the like. Additional examples of alkynyl include heptynyl (C7), octynyl (C8), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkynyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted alkynyl”) or substituted (a“substituted alkynyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is an unsubstituted C2-10 alkynyl. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is a substituted C2-10 alkynyl.
[0022] The term“heteroalkynyl” refers to an alkynyl group, which further includes at least one heteroatom (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms) selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur within (i.e., inserted between adjacent carbon atoms of) and/or placed at one or more terminal position(s) of the parent chain. In certain embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group refers to a group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-10 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-9 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2- 8 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-7 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or more heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-6 alkynyl”). In some
embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-5 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-4 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 heteroatom within the parent chain (“heteroC2-3 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, a heteroalkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at least one triple bond, and 1 or 2 heteroatoms within the parent chain (“heteroC2-6 alkynyl”). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroalkynyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroalkynyl”) or substituted (a“substituted
heteroalkynyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkynyl group is an unsubstituted heteroC2-10 alkynyl. In certain embodiments, the heteroalkynyl group is a substituted heteroC2-10 alkynyl.
[0023] The term“carbocyclyl” or“carbocyclic” refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 14 ring carbon atoms (“C3-14 carbocyclyl”) and zero heteroatoms in the non-aromatic ring system. In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C3-10 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C3-8 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 7 ring carbon atoms (“C3-7 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C3-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 4 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C4-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C5-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C5-10 carbocyclyl”). Exemplary C3-6 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C3), cyclopropenyl (C3), cyclobutyl (C4), cyclobutenyl (C4), cyclopentyl (C5), cyclopentenyl (C5), cyclohexyl (C6), cyclohexenyl (C6), cyclohexadienyl (C6), and the like. Exemplary C3-8 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3-6 carbocyclyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7), cycloheptenyl (C7), cycloheptadienyl (C7), cycloheptatrienyl (C7), cyclooctyl (C8), cyclooctenyl (C8), bicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl (C7), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (C8), and the like.
Exemplary C3-10 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3-8 carbocyclyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C9), cyclononenyl (C9), cyclodecyl (C10), cyclodecenyl (C10), octahydro-1H-indenyl (C9), decahydronaphthalenyl (C10),
spiro[4.5]decanyl (C10), and the like. As the foregoing examples illustrate, in certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic carbocyclyl”) or polycyclic (e.g., containing a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic carbocyclyl”) or tricyclic system (“tricyclic carbocyclyl”)) and can be saturated or can contain one or more carbon-carbon double or triple bonds.“Carbocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the carbocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the carbocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the carbocyclic ring system. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a carbocyclyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted carbocyclyl”) or substituted (a“substituted carbocyclyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is an unsubstituted C3-14 carbocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is a substituted C3-14 carbocyclyl.
[0024] In some embodiments,“carbocyclyl” is a monocyclic, saturated carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 14 ring carbon atoms (“C3-14 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C3-10 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C3-8 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C3-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 4 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C4-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C5-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C5-10 cycloalkyl”). Examples of C5-6 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl (C5) and cyclohexyl (C5). Examples of C3-6 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C5-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclopropyl (C3) and cyclobutyl (C4). Examples of C3-8 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C3-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7) and cyclooctyl (C8). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a cycloalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted cycloalkyl”) or substituted (a“substituted cycloalkyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is an unsubstituted C3-14 cycloalkyl. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is a substituted C3-14 cycloalkyl. [0025] The term“heterocyclyl” or“heterocyclic” refers to a radical of a 3- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“3-14 membered heterocyclyl”). In heterocyclyl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. A heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic (“monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or polycyclic (e.g., a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic heterocyclyl”) or tricyclic system (“tricyclic heterocyclyl”)), and can be saturated or can contain one or more carbon- carbon double or triple bonds. Heterocyclyl polycyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.“Heterocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of heterocyclyl is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heterocyclyl”) or substituted (a“substituted heterocyclyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is an unsubstituted 3-14 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is a substituted 3-14 membered heterocyclyl.
[0026] In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. [0027] Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, and thiiranyl. Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, and thietanyl.
Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl, and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxathiolanyl and dithiolanyl. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 3 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, and dioxanyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 3
heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl. Exemplary 7-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl. Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl. Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclyl groups include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl,
dihydrobenzothienyl, tetrahydrobenzothienyl, tetrahydrobenzofuranyl, tetrahydroindolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, decahydroisoquinolinyl, octahydrochromenyl, octahydroisochromenyl, decahydronaphthyridinyl, decahydro-1,8- naphthyridinyl, octahydropyrrolo[3,2-b]pyrrole, indolinyl, phthalimidyl, naphthalimidyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, 1H-benzo[e][1,4]diazepinyl, 1,4,5,7-tetrahydropyrano[3,4-b]pyrrolyl, 5,6-dihydro-4H-furo[3,2-b]pyrrolyl, 6,7-dihydro-5H-furo[3,2-b]pyranyl, 5,7-dihydro-4H- thieno[2,3-c]pyranyl, 2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 2,3-dihydrofuro[2,3- b]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrofuro[3,2- c]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothieno[3,2-b]pyridinyl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1,6-naphthyridinyl, and the like.
[0028] The term“aryl” refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10, or 14 pi electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system (“C6-14 aryl”). In some embodiments, an aryl group has 6 ring carbon atoms (“C6 aryl”; e.g., phenyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has 10 ring carbon atoms (“C10 aryl”; e.g., naphthyl such as 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has 14 ring carbon atoms (“C14 aryl”; e.g., anthracyl).“Aryl” also includes ring systems wherein the aryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the aryl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbon atoms continue to designate the number of carbon atoms in the aryl ring system. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an aryl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted aryl”) or substituted (a“substituted aryl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is an unsubstituted C6-14 aryl. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is a substituted C6-14 aryl.
[0029] The term“heteroaryl” refers to a radical of a 5-14 membered monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic, tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10, or 14 pi electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-14 membered heteroaryl”). In heteroaryl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. Heteroaryl polycyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.“Heteroaryl” includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heteroaryl ring system. “Heteroaryl” also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused polycyclic (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system. Polycyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like) the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g., 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., 5-indolyl).
[0030] In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, the 5- 6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroaryl group is independently unsubstituted (an“unsubstituted heteroaryl”) or substituted (a“substituted heteroaryl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is an unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is a substituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.
[0031] Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl, and thiophenyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 3 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing 4 heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing 3 or 4 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively. Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl. Exemplary 5,6- bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl,
benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl. Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl. Exemplary tricyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, phenanthridinyl, dibenzofuranyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, and phenazinyl.
[0032]“Heteroaralkyl” is a subset of“alkyl” and refers to an alkyl group substituted by a heteroaryl group, wherein the point of attachment is on the alkyl moiety. [0033] The term“unsaturated bond” refers to a double or triple bond.
[0034] The term“unsaturated” or“partially unsaturated” refers to a moiety that includes at least one double or triple bond.
[0035] The term“saturated” refers to a moiety that does not contain a double or triple bond, i.e., the moiety only contains single bonds.
[0036] Affixing the suffix“-ene” to a group indicates the group is a divalent moiety, e.g., alkylene is the divalent moiety of alkyl, alkenylene is the divalent moiety of alkenyl, alkynylene is the divalent moiety of alkynyl, heteroalkylene is the divalent moiety of heteroalkyl, heteroalkenylene is the divalent moiety of heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynylene is the divalent moiety of heteroalkynyl, carbocyclylene is the divalent moiety of carbocyclyl, heterocyclylene is the divalent moiety of heterocyclyl, arylene is the divalent moiety of aryl, and heteroarylene is the divalent moiety of heteroaryl.
[0037] A group is optionally substituted unless expressly provided otherwise. The term “optionally substituted” refers to being substituted or unsubstituted. In certain embodiments, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted.“Optionally substituted” refers to a group which may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g.,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” alkyl, “substituted” or“unsubstituted” alkenyl,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” alkynyl, “substituted” or“unsubstituted” heteroalkyl,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” heteroalkenyl, “substituted” or“unsubstituted” heteroalkynyl,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” carbocyclyl, “substituted” or“unsubstituted” heterocyclyl,“substituted” or“unsubstituted” aryl or “substituted” or“unsubstituted” heteroaryl group). In general, the term“substituted” means that at least one hydrogen present on a group is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g., a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction. Unless otherwise indicated, a“substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position. The term“substituted” is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, and includes any of the substituents described herein that results in the formation of a stable compound. The present invention contemplates any and all such combinations in order to arrive at a stable compound. For purposes of this invention, heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety. The invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the exemplary substituents described herein.
[0038] Exemplary carbon atom substituents include, but are not limited to, halogen,−CN, −NO2,−N3,−SO2H,−SO3H,−OH,−ORaa,−ON(Rbb)2,−N(Rbb)2,−N(Rbb) +
3 X,−N(ORcc)Rbb, −SH,−SRaa,−SSRcc,−C(=O)Raa,−CO2H,−CHO,−C(ORcc)3,−CO2Raa,−OC(=O)Raa, −OCO2Raa,−C(=O)N(Rbb)2,−OC(=O)N(Rbb)2,−NRbbC(=O)Raa,−NRbbCO2Raa,
−NRbbC(=O)N(Rbb)2,−C(=NRbb)Raa,−C(=NRbb)ORaa,−OC(=NRbb)Raa,−OC(=NRbb)ORaa, −C(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−OC(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−NRbbC(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−C(=O)NRbbSO2Raa, −NRbbSO2Raa,−SO2N(Rbb)2,−SO2Raa,−SO2ORaa,−OSO2Raa,−S(=O)Raa,−OS(=O)Raa, −Si(Raa)3,−OSi(Raa)3−C(=S)N(Rbb)2,−C(=O)SRaa,−C(=S)SRaa,−SC(=S)SRaa,
−SC(=O)SRaa,−OC(=O)SRaa,−SC(=O)ORaa,−SC(=O)Raa,−P(=O)(Raa)2,−P(=O)(ORcc)2, −OP(=O)(Raa)2,−OP(=O)(ORcc)2,−P(=O)(N(Rbb)2)2,−OP(=O)(N(Rbb)2)2,−NRbbP(=O)(Raa)2, −NRbbP(=O)(ORcc)2,−NRbbP(=O)(N(Rbb)2)2,−P(Rcc)2,−P(ORcc)2,−P(Rcc) +
3 X,
−P(ORcc) +
3 X,−P(Rcc)4,−P(ORcc)4,−OP(Rcc)2,−OP(Rcc) +
3 X,−OP(ORcc)2,−OP(ORcc) +
3 X, −OP(Rcc)4,−OP(ORcc)4,−B(Raa)2,−B(ORcc)2,−BRaa(ORcc), C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, heteroC1-10 alkyl, heteroC2-10 alkenyl, heteroC2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups; wherein X is a counterion;
or two geminal hydrogens on a carbon atom are replaced with the group =O, =S, =NN(Rbb)2, =NNRbbC(=O)Raa, =NNRbbC(=O)ORaa, =NNRbbS(=O)2Raa, =NRbb, or =NORcc; each instance of Raa is, independently, selected from C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, heteroC1-10 alkyl, heteroC2-10 alkenyl, heteroC2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Raa groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
each instance of Rbb is, independently, selected from hydrogen,−OH,−ORaa, −N(Rcc)2,−CN,−C(=O)Raa,−C(=O)N(Rcc)2,−CO2Raa,−SO2Raa,−C(=NRcc)ORaa, −C(=NRcc)N(Rcc)2,−SO2N(Rcc)2,−SO2Rcc,−SO2ORcc,−SORaa,−C(=S)N(Rcc)2,−C(=O)SRcc, −C(=S)SRcc,−P(=O)(Raa)2,−P(=O)(ORcc)2,−P(=O)(N(Rcc)2)2, C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, heteroC1-10 alkyl, heteroC2-10 alkenyl, heteroC2-1 0alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rbb groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups; wherein X is a counterion;
each instance of Rcc is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, heteroC1-10 alkyl, heteroC2-10 alkenyl, heteroC2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rcc groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
each instance of Rdd is, independently, selected from halogen,−CN,−NO2,−N3, −SO2H,−SO3H,−OH,−ORee,−ON(Rff)2,−N(Rff)2,−N(Rff) +
3 X,−N(ORee)Rff,−SH,−SRee, −SSRee,−C(=O)Ree,−CO2H,−CO2Ree,−OC(=O)Ree,−OCO2Ree,−C(=O)N(Rff)2,
−OC(=O)N(Rff)2,−NRffC(=O)Ree,−NRffCO2Ree,−NRffC(=O)N(Rff)2,−C(=NRff)ORee, −OC(=NRff)Ree,−OC(=NRff)ORee,−C(=NRff)N(Rff)2,−OC(=NRff)N(Rff)2,
−NRffC(=NRff)N(Rff)2,−NRffSO2Ree,−SO2N(Rff)2,−SO2Ree,−SO2ORee,−OSO2Ree, −S(=O)Ree,−Si(Ree)3,−OSi(Ree)3,−C(=S)N(Rff)2,−C(=O)SRee,−C(=S)SRee,−SC(=S)SRee, −P(=O)(ORee)2,−P(=O)(Ree)2,−OP(=O)(Ree)2,−OP(=O)(ORee)2, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, heteroC1-6 alkyl, heteroC2-6 alkenyl, heteroC2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rgg groups, or two geminal Rdd substituents can be joined to form =O or =S; wherein X is a counterion;
each instance of Ree is, independently, selected from C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, heteroC1-6 alkyl, heteroC2-6 alkenyl, heteroC2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rgg groups;
each instance of Rff is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, heteroC1-6 alkyl, heteroC2-6 alkenyl, heteroC2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two Rff groups are joined to form a 3-10 membered heterocyclyl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rgg groups; and
each instance of Rgg is, independently, halogen,−CN,−NO2,−N3,−SO2H,−SO3H, −OH,−OC +
1-6 alkyl,−ON(C1-6 alkyl)2,−N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−N(C1-6 alkyl)3 X,−NH(C1-6 alkyl) +
2 X,−NH2(C1-6 alkyl)+X,−NH +
3 X,−N(OC1-6 alkyl)(C1-6 alkyl),−N(OH)(C1-6 alkyl), −NH(OH),−SH,−SC1-6 alkyl,−SS(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=O)(C1-6 alkyl),−CO2H,−CO2(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=O)(C1-6 alkyl),−OCO2(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=O)NH2,−C(=O)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, −OC(=O)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−NHC(=O)(C1-6 alkyl),−N(C1-6 alkyl)C(=O)( C1-6 alkyl), −NHCO2(C1-6 alkyl),−NHC(=O)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−NHC(=O)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−NHC(=O)NH2, −C(=NH)O(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=NH)(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=NH)OC1-6 alkyl,−C(=NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−C(=NH)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=NH)NH2,−OC(=NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,
−OC(=NH)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=NH)NH2,−NHC(=NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−NHC(=NH)NH2, −NHSO2(C1-6 alkyl),−SO2N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−SO2NH(C1-6 alkyl),−SO2NH2,−SO2(C1-6 alkyl), −SO2O(C1-6 alkyl),−OSO2(C1-6 alkyl),−SO(C1-6 alkyl),−Si(C1-6 alkyl)3,−OSi(C1-6 alkyl)3 −C(=S)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, C(=S)NH(C1-6 alkyl), C(=S)NH2,−C(=O)S(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=S)SC1-6 alkyl,−SC(=S)SC1-6 alkyl,−P(=O)(OC1-6 alkyl)2,−P(=O)(C1-6 alkyl)2,−OP(=O)(C1-6 alkyl)2, −OP(=O)(OC1-6 alkyl)2, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, heteroC1-6 alkyl, heteroC2-6 alkenyl, heteroC2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or two geminal Rgg substituents can be joined to form =O or =S; wherein X is a counterion.
[0039] In certain embodiments, carbon atom substituents include: halogen,−CN,−NO2,−N3, −SO2H,−SO3H,−OH,−OC1-6 alkyl,−ON(C1-6 alkyl)2,−N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−N(C1-6 alkyl) +
3 X, −NH(C1-6 alkyl) +
2 X,−NH2(C1-6 alkyl)+X,−NH +
3 X,−N(OC1-6 alkyl)(C1-6 alkyl), −N(OH)(C1-6 alkyl),−NH(OH),−SH,−SC1-6 alkyl,−SS(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=O)(C1-6 alkyl), −CO2H,−CO2(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=O)(C1-6 alkyl),−OCO2(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=O)NH2, −C(=O)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−OC(=O)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−NHC(=O)(C1-6 alkyl),−N(C1-6
alkyl)C(=O)( C1-6 alkyl),−NHCO2(C1-6 alkyl),−NHC(=O)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−NHC(=O)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−NHC(=O)NH2,−C(=NH)O(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=NH)(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=NH)OC1-6 alkyl,−C(=NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−C(=NH)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=NH)NH2,−OC(=NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−OC(=NH)NH(C1-6 alkyl),−OC(=NH)NH2,−NHC(=NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2,
−NHC(=NH)NH2,−NHSO2(C1-6 alkyl),−SO2N(C1-6 alkyl)2,−SO2NH(C1-6 alkyl),−SO2NH2, −SO2(C1-6 alkyl),−SO2O(C1-6 alkyl),−OSO2(C1-6 alkyl),−SO(C1-6 alkyl),−Si(C1-6 alkyl)3, −OSi(C1-6 alkyl)3−C(=S)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, C(=S)NH(C1-6 alkyl), C(=S)NH2,−C(=O)S(C1-6 alkyl),−C(=S)SC1-6 alkyl,−SC(=S)SC1-6 alkyl,−P(=O)(OC1-6 alkyl)2,−P(=O)(C1-6 alkyl)2,
Figure imgf000021_0001
alkyl)2,−OP(=O)(OC1-6 alkyl)2, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, heteroC1-6 alkyl, heteroC2-6 alkenyl, heteroC2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or two geminal Rgg substituents can be joined to form =O or =S; wherein X is a counterion.
[0040] The term“halo” or“halogen” refers to fluorine (fluoro,−F), chlorine (chloro,−Cl), bromine (bromo,−Br), or iodine (iodo,−I).
[0041] The term“hydroxyl” or“hydroxy” refers to the group−OH. The term“substituted hydroxyl” or“substituted hydroxyl,” by extension, refers to a hydroxyl group wherein the oxygen atom directly attached to the parent molecule is substituted with a group other than hydrogen, and includes groups selected from−ORaa,−ON(Rbb)2,−OC(=O)SRaa,
−OC(=O)Raa,−OCO2Raa,−OC(=O)N(Rbb)2,−OC(=NRbb)Raa,−OC(=NRbb)ORaa,
−OC(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−OS(=O)Raa,−OSO2Raa,−OSi(Raa)3,−OP(Rcc)2,−OP(Rcc) +
3 X, −OP(ORcc)2,−OP(ORcc) +
3 X,−OP(=O)(Raa)2,−OP(=O)(ORcc)2, and−OP(=O)(N(Rbb)2)2, wherein X, Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein.
[0042] The term“amino” refers to the group−NH2. The term“substituted amino,” by extension, refers to a monosubstituted amino, a disubstituted amino, or a trisubstituted amino. In certain embodiments, the“substituted amino” is a monosubstituted amino or a
disubstituted amino group.
[0043] The term“monosubstituted amino” refers to an amino group wherein the nitrogen atom directly attached to the parent molecule is substituted with one hydrogen and one group other than hydrogen, and includes groups selected from−NH(Rbb),−NHC(=O)Raa, −NHCO2Raa,−NHC(=O)N(Rbb)2,−NHC(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−NHSO2Raa,−NHP(=O)(ORcc)2, and−NHP(=O)(N(Rbb)2)2, wherein Raa, Rbb and Rcc are as defined herein, and wherein Rbb of the group−NH(Rbb) is not hydrogen.
[0044] The term“disubstituted amino” refers to an amino group wherein the nitrogen atom directly attached to the parent molecule is substituted with two groups other than hydrogen, and includes groups selected from−N(Rbb)2,−NRbbC(=O)Raa,−NRbbCO2Raa,
−NRbbC(=O)N(Rbb)2,−NRbbC(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−NRbbSO2Raa,−NRbbP(=O)(ORcc)2, and −NRbbP(=O)(N(Rbb)2)2, wherein Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein, with the proviso that the nitrogen atom directly attached to the parent molecule is not substituted with hydrogen. [0045] The term“trisubstituted amino” refers to an amino group wherein the nitrogen atom directly attached to the parent molecule is substituted with three groups, and includes groups selected from−N(Rbb)3 and−N(Rbb) +
3 X, wherein Rbb and X are as defined herein.
[0046] The term“sulfonyl” refers to a group selected from–SO2N(Rbb)2,–SO2Raa, and– SO2ORaa, wherein Raa and Rbb are as defined herein.
[0047] The term“sulfinyl” refers to the group–S(=O)Raa, wherein Raa is as defined herein.
[0048] The term“acyl” refers to a group having the general formula−C(=O)RX1,
−C(=O)ORX1,−C(=O)−O−C(=O)RX1,−C(=O)SRX1,−C(=O)N(RX1)2,−C(=S)RX1, −C(=S)N(RX1)2,−C(=S)O(RX1),−C(=S)S(RX1),−C(=NRX1)RX1,−C(=NRX1)ORX1, −C(=NRX1)SRX1, and−C(=NRX1)N(RX1)2, wherein RX1 is hydrogen; halogen; substituted or unsubstituted hydroxyl; substituted or unsubstituted thiol; substituted or unsubstituted amino; substituted or unsubstituted acyl, cyclic or acyclic, substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched aliphatic; cyclic or acyclic, substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched heteroaliphatic; cyclic or acyclic, substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched alkyl; cyclic or acyclic, substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched alkenyl; substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, aliphaticoxy, heteroaliphaticoxy, alkyloxy, heteroalkyloxy, aryloxy,
heteroaryloxy, aliphaticthioxy, heteroaliphaticthioxy, alkylthioxy, heteroalkylthioxy, arylthioxy, heteroarylthioxy, mono- or di- aliphaticamino, mono- or di- heteroaliphaticamino, mono- or di- alkylamino, mono- or di- heteroalkylamino, mono- or di-arylamino, or mono- or di-heteroarylamino; or two RX1 groups taken together form a 5- to 6-membered heterocyclic ring. Exemplary acyl groups include aldehydes (−CHO), carboxylic acids (−CO2H), ketones, acyl halides, esters, amides, imines, carbonates, carbamates, and ureas. Acyl substituents include, but are not limited to, any of the substituents described herein, that result in the formation of a stable moiety (e.g., aliphatic, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroaliphatic, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl, oxo, imino, thiooxo, cyano, isocyano, amino, azido, nitro, hydroxyl, thiol, halo, aliphaticamino, heteroaliphaticamino, alkylamino, heteroalkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, alkylaryl, arylalkyl, aliphaticoxy, heteroaliphaticoxy, alkyloxy, heteroalkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aliphaticthioxy, heteroaliphaticthioxy, alkylthioxy, heteroalkylthioxy, arylthioxy, heteroarylthioxy, acyloxy, and the like, each of which may or may not be further substituted).
[0049] The term“carbonyl” refers a group wherein the carbon directly attached to the parent molecule is sp2 hybridized, and is substituted with an oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atom, e.g., a group selected from ketones (e.g.,–C(=O)Raa), carboxylic acids (e.g.,–CO2H), aldehydes (– CHO), esters (e.g.,–CO2Raa,–C(=O)SRaa,–C(=S)SRaa), amides (e.g.,–C(=O)N(Rbb)2,– C(=O)NRbbSO2Raa,−C(=S)N(Rbb)2), and imines (e.g.,–C(=NRbb)Raa,–C(=NRbb)ORaa),– C(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2), wherein Raa and Rbb are as defined herein.
[0050] The term“silyl” refers to the group–Si(Raa)3, wherein Raa is as defined herein.
[0051] The term“oxo” refers to the group =O, and the term“thiooxo” refers to the group =S.
[0052] Nitrogen atoms can be substituted or unsubstituted as valency permits, and include primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary nitrogen atoms. Exemplary nitrogen atom substituents include, but are not limited to, hydrogen,−OH,−ORaa,−N(Rcc)2,−CN, −C(=O)Raa,−C(=O)N(Rcc)2,−CO2Raa,−SO2Raa,−C(=NRbb)Raa,−C(=NRcc)ORaa,
−C(=NRcc)N(Rcc)2,−SO2N(Rcc)2,−SO2Rcc,−SO2ORcc,−SORaa,−C(=S)N(Rcc)2,−C(=O)SRcc, −C(=S)SRcc,−P(=O)(ORcc)2,−P(=O)(Raa)2,−P(=O)(N(Rcc)2)2, C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, heteroC1-10alkyl, heteroC2-10alkenyl, heteroC2-10alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rcc groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups, and wherein Raa, Rbb, Rcc and Rdd are as defined above.
[0053] In certain embodiments, the substituent present on the nitrogen atom is an nitrogen protecting group (also referred to herein as an“amino protecting group”). Nitrogen protecting groups include, but are not limited to,−OH,−ORaa,−N(Rcc)2,−C(=O)Raa,−C(=O)N(Rcc)2, −CO2Raa,−SO2Raa,−C(=NRcc)Raa,−C(=NRcc)ORaa,−C(=NRcc)N(Rcc)2,−SO2N(Rcc)2, −SO2Rcc,−SO2ORcc,−SORaa,−C(=S)N(Rcc)2,−C(=O)SRcc,−C(=S)SRcc, C1-10 alkyl (e.g., aralkyl, heteroaralkyl), C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, heteroC1-10 alkyl, heteroC2-10 alkenyl, heteroC2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl groups, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl,
heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups, and wherein Raa, Rbb, Rcc, and Rdd are as defined herein. Nitrogen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
[0054] For example, nitrogen protecting groups such as amide groups (e.g.,−C(=O)Raa) include, but are not limited to, formamide, acetamide, chloroacetamide, trichloroacetamide, trifluoroacetamide, phenylacetamide, 3-phenylpropanamide, picolinamide, 3- pyridylcarboxamide, N-benzoylphenylalanyl derivative, benzamide, p-phenylbenzamide, o- nitophenylacetamide, o-nitrophenoxyacetamide, acetoacetamide, (N’- dithiobenzyloxyacylamino)acetamide, 3-(p-hydroxyphenyl)propanamide, 3-(o- nitrophenyl)propanamide, 2-methyl-2-(o-nitrophenoxy)propanamide, 2-methyl-2-(o- phenylazophenoxy)propanamide, 4-chlorobutanamide, 3-methyl-3-nitrobutanamide, o- nitrocinnamide, N-acetylmethionine derivative, o-nitrobenzamide and o- (benzoyloxymethyl)benzamide.
[0055] Nitrogen protecting groups such as carbamate groups (e.g.,−C(=O)ORaa) include, but are not limited to, methyl carbamate, ethyl carbamate, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate (Fmoc), 9-(2-sulfo)fluorenylmethyl carbamate, 9-(2,7-dibromo)fluoroenylmethyl carbamate, 2,7-di-t- butyl-[9-(10,10-dioxo-10,10,10,10-tetrahydrothioxanthyl)]methyl carbamate (DBD-Tmoc), 4-methoxyphenacyl carbamate (Phenoc), 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbamate (Troc), 2- trimethylsilylethyl carbamate (Teoc), 2-phenylethyl carbamate (hZ), 1-(1-adamantyl)-1- methylethyl carbamate (Adpoc), 1,1-dimethyl-2-haloethyl carbamate, 1,1-dimethyl-2,2- dibromoethyl carbamate (DB-t-BOC), 1,1-dimethyl-2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbamate
(TCBOC), 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethyl carbamate (Bpoc), 1-(3,5-di-t-butylphenyl)-1- methylethyl carbamate (t-Bumeoc), 2-(2′- and 4′-pyridyl)ethyl carbamate (Pyoc), 2-(N,N- dicyclohexylcarboxamido)ethyl carbamate, t-butyl carbamate (BOC or Boc), 1-adamantyl carbamate (Adoc), vinyl carbamate (Voc), allyl carbamate (Alloc), 1-isopropylallyl carbamate (Ipaoc), cinnamyl carbamate (Coc), 4-nitrocinnamyl carbamate (Noc), 8-quinolyl carbamate, N-hydroxypiperidinyl carbamate, alkyldithio carbamate, benzyl carbamate (Cbz), p-methoxybenzyl carbamate (Moz), p-nitobenzyl carbamate, p-bromobenzyl carbamate, p- chlorobenzyl carbamate, 2,4-dichlorobenzyl carbamate, 4-methylsulfinylbenzyl carbamate (Msz), 9-anthrylmethyl carbamate, diphenylmethyl carbamate, 2-methylthioethyl carbamate, 2-methylsulfonylethyl carbamate, 2-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethyl carbamate, [2-(1,3- dithianyl)]methyl carbamate (Dmoc), 4-methylthiophenyl carbamate (Mtpc), 2,4- dimethylthiophenyl carbamate (Bmpc), 2-phosphonioethyl carbamate (Peoc), 2- triphenylphosphonioisopropyl carbamate (Ppoc), 1,1-dimethyl-2-cyanoethyl carbamate, m- chloro-p-acyloxybenzyl carbamate, p-(dihydroxyboryl)benzyl carbamate, 5- benzisoxazolylmethyl carbamate, 2-(trifluoromethyl)-6-chromonylmethyl carbamate (Tcroc), m-nitrophenyl carbamate, 3,5-dimethoxybenzyl carbamate, o-nitrobenzyl carbamate, 3,4- dimethoxy-6-nitrobenzyl carbamate, phenyl(o-nitrophenyl)methyl carbamate, t-amyl carbamate, S-benzyl thiocarbamate, p-cyanobenzyl carbamate, cyclobutyl carbamate, cyclohexyl carbamate, cyclopentyl carbamate, cyclopropylmethyl carbamate, p- decyloxybenzyl carbamate, 2,2-dimethoxyacylvinyl carbamate, o-(N,N- dimethylcarboxamido)benzyl carbamate, 1,1-dimethyl-3-(N,N-dimethylcarboxamido)propyl carbamate, 1,1-dimethylpropynyl carbamate, di(2-pyridyl)methyl carbamate, 2-furanylmethyl carbamate, 2-iodoethyl carbamate, isoborynl carbamate, isobutyl carbamate, isonicotinyl carbamate, p-(p’-methoxyphenylazo)benzyl carbamate, 1-methylcyclobutyl carbamate, 1- methylcyclohexyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-cyclopropylmethyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-(3,5- dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-(p-phenylazophenyl)ethyl carbamate, 1- methyl-1-phenylethyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-(4-pyridyl)ethyl carbamate, phenyl carbamate, p-(phenylazo)benzyl carbamate, 2,4,6-tri-t-butylphenyl carbamate, 4- (trimethylammonium)benzyl carbamate, and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl carbamate.
[0056] Nitrogen protecting groups such as sulfonamide groups (e.g.,−S(=O)2Raa) include, but are not limited to, p-toluenesulfonamide (Ts), benzenesulfonamide, 2,3,6-trimethyl-4- methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtr), 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtb), 2,6- dimethyl-4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Pme), 2,3,5,6-tetramethyl-4- methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mte), 4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mbs), 2,4,6- trimethylbenzenesulfonamide (Mts), 2,6-dimethoxy-4-methylbenzenesulfonamide (iMds), 2,2,5,7,8-pentamethylchroman-6-sulfonamide (Pmc), methanesulfonamide (Ms), β- trimethylsilylethanesulfonamide (SES), 9-anthracenesulfonamide, 4-(4′,8′- dimethoxynaphthylmethyl)benzenesulfonamide (DNMBS), benzylsulfonamide,
trifluoromethylsulfonamide, and phenacylsulfonamide.
[0057] Other nitrogen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, phenothiazinyl-(10)- acyl derivative, N′-p-toluenesulfonylaminoacyl derivative, N′-phenylaminothioacyl derivative, N-benzoylphenylalanyl derivative, N-acetylmethionine derivative, 4,5-diphenyl-3- oxazolin-2-one, N-phthalimide, N-dithiasuccinimide (Dts), N-2,3-diphenylmaleimide, N-2,5- dimethylpyrrole, N-1,1,4,4-tetramethyldisilylazacyclopentane adduct (STABASE), 5- substituted 1,3-dimethyl-1,3,5-triazacyclohexan-2-one, 5-substituted 1,3-dibenzyl-1,3,5- triazacyclohexan-2-one, 1-substituted 3,5-dinitro-4-pyridone, N-methylamine, N-allylamine, N-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methylamine (SEM), N-3-acetoxypropylamine, N-(1-isopropyl- 4-nitro-2-oxo-3-pyroolin-3-yl)amine, quaternary ammonium salts, N-benzylamine, N-di(4- methoxyphenyl)methylamine, N-5-dibenzosuberylamine, N-triphenylmethylamine (Tr), N- [(4-methoxyphenyl)diphenylmethyl]amine (MMTr), N-9-phenylfluorenylamine (PhF), N- 2,7-dichloro-9-fluorenylmethyleneamine, N-ferrocenylmethylamino (Fcm), N-2- picolylamino N’-oxide, N-1,1-dimethylthiomethyleneamine, N-benzylideneamine, N-p- methoxybenzylideneamine, N-diphenylmethyleneamine, N-[(2- pyridyl)mesityl]methyleneamine, N-(N’,N’-dimethylaminomethylene)amine, N,N’- isopropylidenediamine, N-p-nitrobenzylideneamine, N-salicylideneamine, N-5- chlorosalicylideneamine, N-(5-chloro-2-hydroxyphenyl)phenylmethyleneamine, N- cyclohexylideneamine, N-(5,5-dimethyl-3-oxo-1-cyclohexenyl)amine, N-borane derivative, N-diphenylborinic acid derivative, N-[phenyl(pentaacylchromium- or tungsten)acyl]amine, N-copper chelate, N-zinc chelate, N-nitroamine, N-nitrosoamine, amine N-oxide, diphenylphosphinamide (Dpp), dimethylthiophosphinamide (Mpt),
diphenylthiophosphinamide (Ppt), dialkyl phosphoramidates, dibenzyl phosphoramidate, diphenyl phosphoramidate, benzenesulfenamide, o-nitrobenzenesulfenamide (Nps), 2,4- dinitrobenzenesulfenamide, pentachlorobenzenesulfenamide, 2-nitro-4- methoxybenzenesulfenamide, triphenylmethylsulfenamide, and 3-nitropyridinesulfenamide (Npys). In certain embodiments, a nitrogen protecting group is benzyl (Bn), tert- butyloxycarbonyl (BOC), carbobenzyloxy (Cbz), 9-flurenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), trifluoroacetyl, triphenylmethyl, acetyl (Ac), benzoyl (Bz), p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), 3,4- dimethoxybenzyl (DMPM), p-methoxyphenyl (PMP), 2,2,2-trichloroethyloxycarbonyl (Troc), triphenylmethyl (Tr), tosyl (Ts), brosyl (Bs), nosyl (Ns), mesyl (Ms), triflyl (Tf), or dansyl (Ds).
[0058] In certain embodiments, the substituent present on an oxygen atom is an oxygen protecting group (also referred to herein as an“hydroxyl protecting group”). Oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to,−Raa,−N(Rbb)2,−C(=O)SRaa,−C(=O)Raa, −CO2Raa,−C(=O)N(Rbb)2,−C(=NRbb)Raa,−C(=NRbb)ORaa,−C(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−S(=O)Raa, −SO2Raa,−Si(Raa)3,−P(Rcc)2,−P(Rcc) +
3 X,−P(ORcc)2,−P(ORcc) +
3 X,−P(=O)(Raa)2, −P(=O)(ORcc)2, and−P(=O)(N(Rbb) 2)2, wherein X, Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein. Oxygen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
[0059] Exemplary oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, methoxylmethyl (MOM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), t-butylthiomethyl,
(phenyldimethylsilyl)methoxymethyl (SMOM), benzyloxymethyl (BOM), p- methoxybenzyloxymethyl (PMBM), (4-methoxyphenoxy)methyl (p-AOM), guaiacolmethyl (GUM), t-butoxymethyl, 4-pentenyloxymethyl (POM), siloxymethyl, 2- methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), 2,2,2-trichloroethoxymethyl, bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl, 2- (trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl (SEMOR), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), 3- bromotetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, 1-methoxycyclohexyl, 4- methoxytetrahydropyranyl (MTHP), 4-methoxytetrahydrothiopyranyl, 4- methoxytetrahydrothiopyranyl S,S-dioxide, 1-[(2-chloro-4-methyl)phenyl]-4- methoxypiperidin-4-yl (CTMP), 1,4-dioxan-2-yl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiofuranyl, 2,3,3a,4,5,6,7,7a-octahydro-7,8,8-trimethyl-4,7-methanobenzofuran-2-yl, 1-ethoxyethyl, 1- (2-chloroethoxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-methoxyethyl, 1-methyl-1-benzyloxyethyl, 1-methyl-1- benzyloxy-2-fluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2-trimethylsilylethyl, 2-(phenylselenyl)ethyl, t- butyl, allyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-methoxyphenyl, 2,4-dinitrophenyl, benzyl (Bn), p- methoxybenzyl, 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, p-nitrobenzyl, p-halobenzyl, 2,6- dichlorobenzyl, p-cyanobenzyl, p-phenylbenzyl, 2-picolyl, 4-picolyl, 3-methyl-2-picolyl N- oxido, diphenylmethyl, p,p’-dinitrobenzhydryl, 5-dibenzosuberyl, triphenylmethyl, α- naphthyldiphenylmethyl, p-methoxyphenyldiphenylmethyl, di(p- methoxyphenyl)phenylmethyl, tri(p-methoxyphenyl)methyl, 4-(4’- bromophenacyloxyphenyl)diphenylmethyl, 4,4′,4″-tris(4,5- dichlorophthalimidophenyl)methyl, 4,4′,4″-tris(levulinoyloxyphenyl)methyl, 4,4′,4″- tris(benzoyloxyphenyl)methyl, 3-(imidazol-1-yl)bis(4′,4″-dimethoxyphenyl)methyl, 1,1- bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-1′-pyrenylmethyl, 9-anthryl, 9-(9-phenyl)xanthenyl, 9-(9-phenyl-10- oxo)anthryl, 1,3-benzodithiolan-2-yl, benzisothiazolyl S,S-dioxido, trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), triisopropylsilyl (TIPS), dimethylisopropylsilyl (IPDMS),
diethylisopropylsilyl (DEIPS), dimethylthexylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), t- butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS), tribenzylsilyl, tri-p-xylylsilyl, triphenylsilyl,
diphenylmethylsilyl (DPMS), t-butylmethoxyphenylsilyl (TBMPS), formate, benzoylformate, acetate, chloroacetate, dichloroacetate, trichloroacetate, trifluoroacetate, methoxyacetate, triphenylmethoxyacetate, phenoxyacetate, p-chlorophenoxyacetate, 3-phenylpropionate, 4- oxopentanoate (levulinate), 4,4-(ethylenedithio)pentanoate (levulinoyldithioacetal), pivaloate, adamantoate, crotonate, 4-methoxycrotonate, benzoate, p-phenylbenzoate, 2,4,6- trimethylbenzoate (mesitoate), methyl carbonate, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbonate (Fmoc), ethyl carbonate, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbonate (Troc), 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl carbonate (TMSEC), 2-(phenylsulfonyl) ethyl carbonate (Psec), 2-(triphenylphosphonio) ethyl carbonate (Peoc), isobutyl carbonate, vinyl carbonate, allyl carbonate, t-butyl carbonate (BOC or Boc), p- nitrophenyl carbonate, benzyl carbonate, p-methoxybenzyl carbonate, 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl carbonate, o-nitrobenzyl carbonate, p-nitrobenzyl carbonate, S-benzyl thiocarbonate, 4- ethoxy-1-napththyl carbonate, methyl dithiocarbonate, 2-iodobenzoate, 4-azidobutyrate, 4- nitro-4-methylpentanoate, o-(dibromomethyl)benzoate, 2-formylbenzenesulfonate, 2- (methylthiomethoxy)ethyl, 4-(methylthiomethoxy)butyrate, 2- (methylthiomethoxymethyl)benzoate, 2,6-dichloro-4-methylphenoxyacetate, 2,6-dichloro-4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenoxyacetate, 2,4-bis(1,1-dimethylpropyl)phenoxyacetate, chlorodiphenylacetate, isobutyrate, monosuccinoate, (E)-2-methyl-2-butenoate, o- (methoxyacyl)benzoate, α-naphthoate, nitrate, alkyl N,N,N’,N’- tetramethylphosphorodiamidate, alkyl N-phenylcarbamate, borate, dimethylphosphinothioyl, alkyl 2,4-dinitrophenylsulfenate, sulfate, methanesulfonate (mesylate), benzylsulfonate, and tosylate (Ts). In certain embodiments, an oxygen protecting group is silyl. In certain embodiments, an oxygen protecting group is t-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS), t- butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), triisoproylsilyl (TIPS), triphenylsilyl (TPS), triethylsilyl (TES), trimethylsilyl (TMS), triisopropylsiloxymethyl (TOM), acetyl (Ac), benzoyl (Bz), allyl carbonate, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbonate (Troc), 2-trimethylsilylethyl carbonate,
methoxymethyl (MOM), 1-ethoxyethyl (EE), 2-methyoxy-2-propyl (MOP), 2,2,2- trichloroethoxyethyl, 2-methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), 2-trimethylsilylethoxymethyl (SEM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), tetrahydrofuranyl (THF), p- methoxyphenyl (PMP), triphenylmethyl (Tr), methoxytrityl (MMT), dimethoxytrityl (DMT), allyl, p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), t-butyl, benzyl (Bn), allyl, or pivaloyl (Piv).
[0060] In certain embodiments, the substituent present on a sulfur atom is a sulfur protecting group (also referred to as a“thiol protecting group”). Sulfur protecting groups include, but are not limited to,−Raa,−N(Rbb)2,−C(=O)SRaa,−C(=O)Raa,−CO2Raa,−C(=O)N(Rbb)2, −C(=NRbb)Raa,−C(=NRbb)ORaa,−C(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2,−S(=O)Raa,−SO2Raa,−Si(Raa)3, −P(Rcc)2,−P(Rcc) +
3 X,−P(ORcc)2,−P(ORcc) +
3 X,−P(=O)(Raa)2,−P(=O)(ORcc)2, and −P(=O)(N(Rbb) 2)2, wherein Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein. Sulfur protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference. In certain embodiments, a sulfur protecting group is acetamidomethyl, t-Bu, 3-nitro-2-pyridine sulfenyl, 2-pyridine-sulfenyl, or triphenylmethyl.
[0061] A“counterion” or“anionic counterion” is a negatively charged group associated with a positively charged group in order to maintain electronic neutrality. An anionic counterion may be monovalent (i.e., including one formal negative charge). An anionic counterion may also be multivalent (i.e., including more than one formal negative charge), such as divalent or trivalent. Exemplary counterions include halide ions (e.g., F, Cl, Br, I), NO
3 , ClO
4 , OH, H
2PO
4 , HCO
3 , HSO4 , sulfonate ions (e.g., methansulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, p– toluenesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, 10–camphor sulfonate, naphthalene–2–sulfonate, naphthalene–1–sulfonic acid–5–sulfonate, ethan–1–sulfonic acid–2–sulfonate, and the like), carboxylate ions (e.g., acetate, propanoate, benzoate, glycerate, lactate, tartrate, glycolate, gluconate, and the like), BF
4 , PF
4 , PF
6 , AsF
6 , SbF
6 , B[3,5-(CF3)2C6H3]4], B(C
6F5)4 , BPh
4 , Al(OC(CF3)3)
4 , and carborane anions (e.g., CB11H
12 or (HCB11Me5Br6)).
Exemplary counterions which may be multivalent include CO 2− 3−
3 , HPO 2−
4 , PO4 , B4O 2−
7 , SO 2− −
4 , S2O 2
3 , carboxylate anions (e.g., tartrate, citrate, fumarate, maleate, malate, malonate, gluconate, succinate, glutarate, adipate, pimelate, suberate, azelate, sebacate, salicylate, phthalates, aspartate, glutamate, and the like), and carboranes.
[0062] As used herein, use of the phrase“at least one instance” refers to 1, 2, 3, 4, or more instances, but also encompasses a range, e.g., for example, from 1 to 4, from 1 to 3, from 1 to 2, from 2 to 4, from 2 to 3, or from 3 to 4 instances, inclusive.
[0063] The term“carbohydrate” or“saccharide” refers to an aldehydic or ketonic derivative of polyhydric alcohols. Carbohydrates include compounds with relatively small molecules (e.g., sugars) as well as macromolecular or polymeric substances (e.g., starch, glycogen, and cellulose polysaccharides). The term“sugar” refers to monosaccharides, disaccharides, or polysaccharides. Monosaccharides are the simplest carbohydrates in that they cannot be hydrolyzed to smaller carbohydrates. Most monosaccharides can be represented by the general formula CyH2yOy (e.g., C6H12O6 (a hexose such as glucose)), wherein y is an integer equal to or greater than 3. Certain polyhydric alcohols not represented by the general formula described above may also be considered monosaccharides. For example, deoxyribose is of the formula C5H10O4 and is a monosaccharide. Monosaccharides usually consist of five or six carbon atoms and are referred to as pentoses and hexoses, receptively. If the monosaccharide contains an aldehyde it is referred to as an aldose; and if it contains a ketone, it is referred to as a ketose. Monosaccharides may also consist of three, four, or seven carbon atoms in an aldose or ketose form and are referred to as trioses, tetroses, and heptoses, respectively.
Glyceraldehyde and dihydroxyacetone are considered to be aldotriose and ketotriose sugars, respectively. Examples of aldotetrose sugars include erythrose and threose; and ketotetrose sugars include erythrulose. Aldopentose sugars include ribose, arabinose, xylose, and lyxose; and ketopentose sugars include ribulose, arabulose, xylulose, and lyxulose. Examples of aldohexose sugars include glucose (for example, dextrose), mannose, galactose, allose, altrose, talose, gulose, and idose; and ketohexose sugars include fructose, psicose, sorbose, and tagatose. Ketoheptose sugars include sedoheptulose. Each carbon atom of a
monosaccharide bearing a hydroxyl group (−OH), with the exception of the first and last carbons, is asymmetric, making the carbon atom a stereocenter with two possible configurations (R or S). Because of this asymmetry, a number of isomers may exist for any given monosaccharide formula. The aldohexose D-glucose, for example, has the formula C6H12O6, of which all but two of its six carbons atoms are stereogenic, making D-glucose one of the 16 (i.e., 24) possible stereoisomers. The assignment of D or L is made according to the orientation of the asymmetric carbon furthest from the carbonyl group: in a standard Fischer projection if the hydroxyl group is on the right the molecule is a D sugar, otherwise it is an L sugar. The aldehyde or ketone group of a straight-chain monosaccharide will react reversibly with a hydroxyl group on a different carbon atom to form a hemiacetal or hemiketal, forming a heterocyclic ring with an oxygen bridge between two carbon atoms. Rings with five and six atoms are called furanose and pyranose forms, respectively, and exist in equilibrium with the straight-chain form. During the conversion from the straight-chain form to the cyclic form, the carbon atom containing the carbonyl oxygen, called the anomeric carbon, becomes a stereogenic center with two possible configurations: the oxygen atom may take a position either above or below the plane of the ring. The resulting possible pair of stereoisomers is called anomers. In an α anomer, the−OH substituent on the anomeric carbon rests on the opposite side (trans) of the ring from the−CH2OH side branch. The alternative form, in which the−CH2OH substituent and the anomeric hydroxyl are on the same side (cis) of the plane of the ring, is called a β anomer. A carbohydrate including two or more joined monosaccharide units is called a disaccharide or polysaccharide (e.g., a trisaccharide), respectively. The two or more monosaccharide units bound together by a covalent bond known as a glycosidic linkage formed via a dehydration reaction, resulting in the loss of a hydrogen atom from one monosaccharide and a hydroxyl group from another. Exemplary disaccharides include sucrose, lactulose, lactose, maltose, isomaltose, trehalose, cellobiose, xylobiose, laminaribiose, gentiobiose, mannobiose, melibiose, nigerose, or rutinose.
Exemplary trisaccharides include, but are not limited to, isomaltotriose, nigerotriose, maltotriose, melezitose, maltotriulose, raffinose, and kestose. The term carbohydrate also includes other natural or synthetic stereoisomers of the carbohydrates described herein.
[0064] The term“salt” refers to any and all salts, and encompasses pharmaceutically acceptable salts. The term“pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, Berge et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19, incorporated herein by reference. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, and perchloric acid or with organic acids, such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid, or malonic acid or by using other methods known in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate,
ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2- naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium, and N+(C1-4 alkyl)
4 salts. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, lower alkyl sulfonate, and aryl sulfonate.
[0065] The term“solvent” refers to a substance that dissolves one or more solutes, resulting in a solution. A solvent may serve as a medium for any reaction or transformation described herein. The solvent may dissolve one or more reactants or reagents in a reaction mixture. The solvent may facilitate the mixing of one or more reagents or reactants in a reaction mixture. The solvent may also serve to increase or decrease the rate of a reaction relative to the reaction in a different solvent. Solvents can be polar or non-polar, protic or aprotic. Common organic solvents useful in the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, acetone, acetonitrile, benzene, benzonitrile, 1-butanol, 2-butanone, butyl acetate, tert-butyl methyl ether, carbon disulfide carbon tetrachloride, chlorobenzene, 1-chlorobutane, chloroform, cyclohexane, cyclopentane, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, 1,2-dichloroethane, dichloromethane (DCM), N,N-dimethylacetamide N,N-dimethylformamide (DMF), 1,3- dimethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinone (DMPU), 1,4-dioxane, 1,3-dioxane, diethylether, 2-ethoxyethyl ether, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, dimethyl ether, heptane, n- hexane, hexanes, hexamethylphosphoramide (HMPA), 2-methoxyethanol, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, methyl alcohol, 2-methylbutane, 4-methyl-2-pentanone, 2-methyl-1-propanol, 2- methyl-2-propanol, 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), nitromethane, 1- octanol, pentane, 3-pentanone, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, pyridine, tetrachloroethylene, tetrahyrdofuran (THF), 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, toluene, trichlorobenzene, 1,1,2- trichlorotrifluoroethane, 2,2,4-trimethylpentane, trimethylamine, triethylamine, N,N- diisopropylethylamine, diisopropylamine, water, o-xylene, p-xylene.
[0066]“Oxidant,”“oxidizing agent” or“chemical oxidant” refers to a chemical compound or substance that has the ability to oxidize another compound. Oxidation, as will be appreciated by one of skill in the art, is the loss of electrons– and an oxidizing agent is a chemical agent that removes electrons from another compound. In certain embodiments, the oxidant is a two- electron oxidant (i.e., removed two electrons from the other compound). Examples of chemical oxidants can be found in the literature, e.g., Carey and Sundberg. Advanced
Organic Chemistry Part B: Reactions and Synthesis, Fifth Edition (7007) New York, NY: Springer; 675-783 and references cited therein. Examples of commerically available chemical oxidants can also be found on the internet, e.g., www.sigmaaldrich.com/chemistry/chemistry- products.html?TablePage=16277367.
[0067] The term“small molecule” refers to molecules, whether naturally-occurring or artificially created (e.g., via chemical synthesis) that have a relatively low molecular weight. Typically, a small molecule is an organic compound (i.e., it contains carbon). The small molecule may contain multiple carbon-carbon bonds, stereocenters, and other functional groups (e.g., amines, hydroxyl, carbonyls, and heterocyclic rings, etc.). In certain
embodiments, the molecular weight of a small molecule is not more than about 1,000 g/mol, not more than about 900 g/mol, not more than about 800 g/mol, not more than about 700 g/mol, not more than about 600 g/mol, not more than about 500 g/mol, not more than about 400 g/mol, not more than about 300 g/mol, not more than about 200 g/mol, or not more than about 100 g/mol. In certain embodiments, the molecular weight of a small molecule is at least about 100 g/mol, at least about 200 g/mol, at least about 300 g/mol, at least about 400 g/mol, at least about 500 g/mol, at least about 600 g/mol, at least about 700 g/mol, at least about 800 g/mol, or at least about 900 g/mol, or at least about 1,000 g/mol. Combinations of the above ranges (e.g., at least about 200 g/mol and not more than about 500 g/mol) are also possible. In certain embodiments, the small molecule is a therapeutically active agent such as a drug (e.g., a molecule approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration as provided in the Code of Federal Regulations (C.F.R.)). The small molecule may also be complexed with one or more metal atoms and/or metal ions. In this instance, the small molecule is also referred to as a “small organometallic molecule.” Preferred small molecules are biologically active in that they produce a biological effect in animals, preferably mammals, more preferably humans. Small molecules include, but are not limited to, radionuclides and imaging agents. In certain embodiments, the small molecule is a drug. Preferably, though not necessarily, the drug is one that has already been deemed safe and effective for use in humans or animals by the appropriate governmental agency or regulatory body. For example, drugs approved for human use are listed by the FDA under 21 C.F.R. §§ 330.5, 331 through 361, and 440 through 460, incorporated herein by reference; drugs for veterinary use are listed by the FDA under 21 C.F.R. §§ 500 through 589, incorporated herein by reference. All listed drugs are considered acceptable for use in accordance with the present invention.
[0068] A“large organic molecule” or“large molecule” refers to an organic compound that is not a small molecule. In certain embodiments, the molecular weight of a large molecule is greater than about 2,000 g/mol, greater than about 3,000 g/mol, greater than about 4,000 g/mol, or greater than about 5,000 g/mol. In certain embodiments, the molecular weight of a large molecule is at most about 100,000 g/mol, at most about 30,000 g/mol, at most about 10,000 g/mol, at most about 5,000 g/mol, or at most about 2,000 g/mol. Combinations of the above ranges (e.g., greater than about 2,000 g/mol and at most about 10,000 g/mol) are also possible. In certain embodiments, the large molecule is a therapeutically active agent such as a drug (e.g., a molecule approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration as provided in the Code of Federal Regulations (C.F.R.)).The large molecule may also be complexed with one or more metal atoms and/or metal ions. In this instance, the large molecule is also referred to as an“large organometallic compound.”
[0069] These and other exemplary substituents are described in more detail in the Detailed Description, Examples, and Claims. The invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the above exemplary listing of substituents. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN EMBODIMENTS
[0070] Provided herein are systems, reagents, compounds, and methods for the glycosylation of organic molecules. In one aspect, the invention provides a method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound (i.e., a glycosyl acceptor), the method comprising contacting a glycosyl donor with the hydroxyl-containing organic compound, in the presence of an oxidant, to yield a glycosylated organic compound. [0071] In certain embodiments,“glycosyl donors” useful in the provided methods are of the following formula:
Figure imgf000034_0001
,
and salts thereof, wherein each R is independently a substituent on the pyranose backbone.
[0072] In certain embodiments, each substituent on the sugar backbone (group R) is independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted hydroxyl, optionally substituted amino, or a carbohydrate. In certain embodiments, R is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R is optionally substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, R is optionally substituted hydroxyl. In certain embodiments, R is optionally substituted amino. In certain embodiments, R is a carbohydrate (e.g., sugar or polysaccharide).
[0073] In certain embodiments, each substituent on the sugar backbone (group R) is independently–CH2OH,–CH2OBn,–OH,–OBn,–OBz,–OFmoc,–OTBS,–NPhth, –CO2Bn,–CH3,–H, or a carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar). As defined herein, Bn is–CH2Ph; Bz is –C(=O)Ph; Fmoc is 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate; TBS is tert-butyldimethylsilyl; and NPhth is a phthalimide group.
[0074] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000034_0002
,
or a salt thereof. [0075] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000035_0001
, or a salt thereof.
[0076] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000035_0002
,
or a salt thereof.
[0077] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000035_0003
,
or a salt thereof.
[0078] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000035_0004
,
or a salt thereof. [0079] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000036_0001
, or a salt thereof.
[0080] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
,
Figure imgf000036_0002
or a salt thereof.
[0081] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl donor is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000036_0003
,
Figure imgf000037_0001
,
or a salt thereof.
[0082] A“glycosyl acceptor” is any hydroxyl-containing organic compound. A hydroxyl- containing organic compound is any organic molecule comprising an–OH group. In certain embodiments, a hydroxyl-containing organic compound is of the formula R2–OH, or a salt thereof, wherein R2 is an organic compound. In certain embodiments, R2 is a small molecule. In certain embodiments, R2 is a large molecule. In certain embodiments, R2 is a carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar). In certain embodiments, R2 is a monosaccharide, disaccharide, trisaccharide, or polysaccharide.
[0083] In certain embodiments, the method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound comprises contacting a glycosyl donor provided herein, or a salt thereof, with a hydroxyl-containing organic compound of the formula R2–OH, or a salt thereof, in the presence of an oxidant to yield a compound of Formula (S-1):
Figure imgf000037_0002
wherein each R is independently a substituent on the pyranose ring, as defined herein.
[0084] In certain embodiments, each substituent on the sugar backbone (e.g., group R) is independently–CH2OH,–CH2OBn,–OH,–OBn,–OBz,–OFmoc,–OTBS,–NPhth,– CO2Bn,–CH3,–H, or another carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar).
[0085] In certain embodiments, the grou corres onding to:
Figure imgf000037_0003
is of the following formulae: ,
Figure imgf000038_0001
[0086] In certain embodiments, the grou corres onding to:
Figure imgf000038_0002
is of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000038_0003
.
[0087] In certain embodiments, the grou corres onding to:
Figure imgf000038_0004
is of one of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000038_0005
.
[0088] In certain embodiments, the grou corres onding to:
Figure imgf000038_0006
is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000039_0001
.
[0089] In certain embodiments, the grou corres onding to:
Figure imgf000039_0002
is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000039_0003
.
[0090] In certain embodiments, the group corresponding to:
Figure imgf000039_0004
is of one of the following formulae:
,
Figure imgf000039_0005
[0091] In certain embodiments, the grou corres ondin to:
Figure imgf000039_0006
is of one of the following formulae:
,
Figure imgf000040_0001
[0092] As described herein, the“glycosyl acceptor” is a hydroxyl-containing organic molecule, and may be a hydroxyl-containing carbohydrate (e.g., sugar). When the glycosyl acceptor is a hydroxyl-containing monosaccharide, in certain embodiments, the product of the glycosylation is a disaccharide.
[0093] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000040_0002
, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0094] In certain embodiments, each substituent on the sugar backbone (group R) is independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted hydroxyl, optionally substituted amino, or a carbohydrate. In certain embodiments, R is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R is optionally substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, R is optionally substituted hydroxyl. In certain embodiments, R is optionally substituted amino. In certain embodiments, R is a carbohydrate (e.g., sugar or polysaccharide).
[0095] In certain embodiments, each substituent on the sugar backbone (group R) is independently–CH2OH,–CH2OBn,–OH,–OBn,–OBz,–OFmoc,–OTBS,–NPhth, –CO2Bn,–CH3,–H, or a carbohydrate (e.g., a sugar). As defined herein, Bn is–CH2Ph; Bz is –C(=O)Ph; Fmoc is 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate; TBS is tert-butyldimethylsilyl; and NPhth is a phthalimide group. [0096] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000042_0001
,
or a salt thereof, wherein:
R1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
[0097] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of the formula:
Figure imgf000042_0002
,
or a salt thereof.
[0098] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000042_0003
,
or a salt thereof.
[0099] As generally defined herein, R1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl. In certain embodiments, R1 is optionally substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, R1 is optionally substituted aryl. In certain embodiments, R1 is optionally substituted heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R1 is optionally substituted heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, R1 is optionally substituted carbocyclyl. In certain embodiments, R1 is optionally substituted acyl. In certain
embodiments, R1 is optionally substituted phenyl. In certain embodiments, R1 is substituted phenyl. In certain embodiments, R1 is unsubstituted phenyl (i.e.,–Ph).
[00100] Therefore, the glycosyl acceptor is, in certain embodiments, of one of the following formulae:
,
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000044_0001
or a salt thereof .
[00101] In certain embodiments, the glcosl accetor is of one of the formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000044_0002
[00102] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of the formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000044_0003
[00103] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
or a salt thereof .
[00104] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000046_0002
Figure imgf000047_0001
[00105] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000048_0001
,
or a salt thereof.
[00106] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000048_0002
,
or a salt thereof.
[00107] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000048_0003
,
or a salt thereof. [00108] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000049_0001
,
or a salt thereof.
[00109] In certain embodiments, the hydroxyl-containing organic compound of the formula R2–OH, or a salt thereof, and the glycosylation product is a compound of Formula (S-1):
Figure imgf000049_0002
(S-1),
wherein each R is independently a substituent on the pyranose ring.
[00110] In certain embodiments, R2 is of any one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000049_0003
.
[00111] In certain embodiments, R2 is of any one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000049_0004
,
Figure imgf000050_0001
[00112] In certain embodiments, R2 is of any one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
[00113] In certain embodiments, R2 is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000052_0002
Figure imgf000053_0001
[00114] In certain embodiments, R2 is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000053_0002
Figure imgf000054_0001
Figure imgf000055_0001
.
[00115] The methods provided herein comprise a step of glycosylating that is carried out in the presence of an oxidant. In certain embodiments, the oxidant is a chemical oxidant (i.e., oxidizing agent). In certain embodiments, the oxidant is a 2-electron oxidant. In certain embodiments, the oxidant is ceric ammonium nitrate (CAN). In certain embodiments, the oxidant is a hypervalent iodine reagent. In certain embodiments, the oxidant is
(bis(trifluoroacetoxy)iodo)benzene (PIFA). The oxidant may be used in stoichiometric, substoichiometric, catalytic, or excess amounts. In certain embodiments, less than 1 molar equivalent of the oxidant is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, approximately 1 molar equivalent of the oxidant is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, more than 1 molar equivalent of the oxidant is used relative to the glycosyl donor (i.e., excess). In certain embodiments, 1-2 molar equivalents (e.g., about 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, or 1.9 molar equivalents) of the oxidant is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, approximately 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, or 10 equivalents are used.
[00116] The step of glycosylating may be carried out in the presence of one or more additional agents. In certain embodiments, the step of glycosylating is carried out in the presence of a Lewis acid. In certain embodiments, the Lewis acid is a boron species. In certain embodiments, the Lewis acid is boron trifluoride. In certain embodiments, the Lewis acid is boron trifluoride diethyletherate (BF3•OEt2). The Lewis acid may be used in stoichiometric, substoichiometric, catalytic, or excess amounts. In certain embodiments, less than 1 molar equivalent of the Lewis acid is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, about 1 molar equivalent of the Lewis acid is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, more than 1 molar equivalent of the Lewis acid is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, 1-2 molar equivalents (e.g., about 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9 molar equivalents) of the Lewis acid is used relative to the glycosyl donor. In certain embodiments, approximately 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, or 10 equivalents are used. [00117] In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of an oxidant and a Lewis acid. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of an oxidant and BF3•OEt2. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and a Lewis acid. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF3•OEt2. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of approximately 1.1 equivalents of PIFA and 1 equivalent of BF3•OEt2. In certain
embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF3•OEt2, in CH2Cl2 and MeCN. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of
approximately 1.1 equivalents of PIFA and 1 equivalent of BF3•OEt2, in CH2Cl2 and MeCN. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF3•OEt2, in CH2Cl2 and MeCN, at room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of approximately 1.1 equivalents of PIFA and 1 equivalent of BF3•OEt2, in CH2Cl2 and MeCN, at room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of PIFA and BF3•OEt2, in CH2Cl2 and MeCN, at room temperature, for 30 minutes or more. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out in the presence of approximately 1.1 equivalents of PIFA and 1 equivalent of BF3•OEt2, in CH2Cl2 and MeCN, at room temperature, for 30 minutes or more.
[00118] In certain embodiments, the step of glycosylating is carried out in a solvent. The solvent may be any solvent, including polar and non-polar solvents. In certain embodiments, the solvent is aprotic. In certain embodiments, the solvent is a polar solvent. In certain embodiments, the solvent is an alkyl nitrile. In certain embodiments, the solvent is acetonitrile (MeCN). In certain embodiments, the solvent is CH2Cl2. In certain embodiments, the solvent is a mixture of CH2Cl2 and MeCN. In certain embodiments, the solvent is a mixture of CH2Cl2 and MeCN (1/1).
[00119] The step of glycosylation can be carried out at any temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at or around room temperature (about 21 °C). In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature below room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature above room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature between 21 °C and 70 °C. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at or around 60 °C.
[00120] Other reagents (e.g., chemical oxidants) and conditions useful in the glycosylation reactions provided herein can be found in the literature. See, e.g., Boons, Geert-Jan; Karl J. Hale (2000). Organic synthesis with carbohydrates. Blackwell Publishing, the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference; and Crich, D.; Lim, L. Org. React.2004, 64, 115; Bufali, S.; Seeberger, P. Org. React.2006, 68, 303; and references cited therein, the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00121] In certain embodiments, the methods described herein yield glycosylated organic molecules with anomeric selectivity.“Anomeric selectivity” refers to the amount of one anomer formed in a reaction as compared to the amount of the opposite anomer formed in the reaction.“Anomers” are sugar stereoisomers that are isomeric with respect to the
stereochemistry of the anomeric carbon of the sugar. Anomers are either alpha (α) or beta (β) anomers. For example, α and β anomeric forms are shown for compounds of Formula (S-1) below:
Figure imgf000057_0001
(α anomer) (β anomer)
[00122] In certain embodiments, the step of glycosylating yields a glycosylated organic molecule (e.g., a compound of Formula (S-1)) in a β:α anomeric ratio greater than 1:1. In certain embodiments, the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 7:1, 8:1, 9:1, 10:1, 11:1, 12:1, 13:1, 14:1, 15:1, 16:1, 17:1, 18:1, 19:1, 20:1, 21:1, 22:1, 23:1, 24:1, 25:1, 30:1, 35:1, 40:1, 45:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, 80:1, 90:1, or 100:1. In certain embodiments, the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 3:1. In certain embodiments, the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 5:1. In certain embodiments, the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 10:1. In certain embodiments, the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 15:1. In certain embodiments, the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 20:1. In certain embodiments, the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 25:1.
[00123] In certain embodiments, the step of glycosylating yields a glycosylated organic molecule (e.g., a compound of Formula (S-1)) in a α:β anomeric ratio greater than 1:1. In certain embodiments, the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 7:1, 8:1, 9:1, 10:1, 11:1, 12:1, 13:1, 14:1, 15:1, 16:1, 17:1, 18:1, 19:1, 20:1, 21:1, 22:1, 23:1, 24:1, 25:1, 30:1, 35:1, 40:1, 45:1, 50:1, 60:1, 70:1, 80:1, 90:1, or 100:1. In certain embodiments, the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 3:1. In certain embodiments, the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 5:1. In certain embodiments, the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 10:1. In certain embodiments, the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 15:1. In certain embodiments, the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 20:1. In certain embodiments, the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 25:1.
[00124] The glycosylated compound can be isolated in any chemical yield. In certain embodiments, the compound is isolated in from 1-10%, 10-20% 20-30%, 30-40%, 40-50%, 50-60%, 60-70%, 70-80%, 80-90%, or 90-100% yield. In certain embodiments, the compound is produced in approximately 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or 100% yield.
[00125] After formation, the product may be purified via one or more purification steps. For example, in certain embodiments, the product is purified by chromatography, extraction, filtration, precipitation, crystallization, or any other method known in the art. In certain embodiments, the compound is carried forward to a subsequent synthetic step without purification (i.e., crude).
[00126] In certain embodiments, the glycosyl acceptor employed in the glycosylation reaction is a sugar that comprises a“latent glycosyl donor” moiety. In certain embodiments, “latent glycosyl donor” moiety is a protected phenol moiety of the following formula:
Figure imgf000058_0001
.
[00127] In certain embodiments,“latent glycosyl donor” moiety is a protected phenol moiety of the following formula:
Figure imgf000058_0002
.
[00128] Deprotection of the“latent glycosyl donor” moiety provides a free phenol, thereby converting the latent glycosyl donor into a glycosyl donor (i.e.,“active” glycosyl donor) that can then be used in a glycosylation reaction provided herein. Iterative steps of glycosylation and deprotection of the latent glycosyl donor moiety can be used to construct trisaccharides, polysaccharides, and complex glycans, among other carbohydrates. This iterative glycosylation/deprotection/glycosylation concept is represented in the following scheme (structures shown are exemplary):
Figure imgf000059_0001
[00129] In certain embodiments, a method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound described herein further comprises the steps of:
(a) deprotecting the glycosylation product (e.g., a compound of Formula (S-1)) to convert the group corresponding to the formula:
Figure imgf000059_0002
,
to a group of the following formula:
Figure imgf000059_0003
(b) contacting the compound provided in step (a) with a hydroxyl-containing organic compound (e.g., a compound of the formula R2–OH), or a salt thereof, in the presence of an oxidant, thereby glycosylating the hydroxyl organic compound.
[00130] Step (b) above is a glycosylation reaction, and therefore any reagents or conditions described herein for a step of glycosylating may be used in this step. Regarding step (a) above, any reagents or conditions may be used in the step of deprotecting.
[00131] In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of a nucleophile or base. In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of an alcohol. In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of hydroxide (e.g., NaOH, KOH, LiOH). In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of an alkoxide (e.g., methoxide, ethoxide). In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of ethanolamine. In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of sodium methoxide.
[00132] In certain embodiments, the step of deprotecting is carried out in a solvent. The solvent may be any solvent, including polar and non-polar solvents. In certain embodiments, the solvent is a polar solvent. In certain embodiments, the solvent is an alcohol. In certain embodiments, the solvent is methanol. In certain embodiments, the solvent is THF.
[00133] In certain embodiments, the deprotection is carried out in the presence of ethanolamine. In certain embodiments, the deprotection is carried out in the presence of excess ethanolamine (i.e., greater than 1 equivalent). In certain embodiments, the
deprotection is carried out in the presence of excess ethanolamine in THF. In certain embodiments, the deprotection is carried out in the presence of excess ethanolamine, in THF, at around room temperature.
[00134] The step of deprotecting can be carried out at any temperature. In certain
embodiments, the reaction is carried out at or around room temperature (about 21 °C). In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature below room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature above room temperature. In certain embodiments, the reaction is carried out at a temperature between 21 °C and 100 °C.
[00135] The deprotected product can be isolated in any chemical yield. In certain
embodiments, the compound is isolated in from 1-10%, 10-20% 20-30%, 30-40%, 40-50%, 50-60%, 60-70%, 70-80%, 80-90%, or 90-100% yield. In certain embodiments, the compound is produced in approximately 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or 100% yield.
[00136] After deprotection, the product may be purified via one or more purification steps. For example, in certain embodiments, the product is purified by chromatography, extraction, filtration, precipitation, crystallization, or any other method known in the art. In certain embodiments, the compound is carried forward to a subsequent synthetic step without purification (i.e., crude).
[00137] Any of the methods described herein may further comprise the steps of:
(c) deprotecting a latent glycosyl donor moiety, thereby yielding an active glycosyl donor; and
(d) using the glycosyl donor produced in step (c) in a subsequent glycosylation reaction. [00138] In other embodiments, any of the methods described herein may further comprise the steps of:
(c) deprotecting a hydroxyl group on the glycosylation product, thereby yielding a glycosyl acceptor (i.e., a compound with a free hydroxyl group); and
(d) using the glycosyl acceptor produced in step (c) in a subsequent glycosylation reaction.
[00139] Any of the methods provided herein may further comprise any number of iterative glycosylating/deprotecting steps to provide a trisaccharide, polysaccharide, glycan, etc. In certain embodiments, the method include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more iterations. Compounds
[00140] The present invention also provides compounds that are useful as glycosyl donors or glycosyl acceptors in the methods provided herein. Provided herein around compounds of the following formula:
Figure imgf000061_0001
,
and salts thereof.
[00141] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000061_0002
, or a salt thereof. [00142] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000062_0001
, or a salt thereof.
[00143] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000062_0002
,
or a salt thereof.
[00144] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000062_0003
,
or a salt thereof.
[00145] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compound of the following formula:
Figure imgf000062_0004
,
and salts thereof. [00146] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000063_0001
, or a salt thereof.
[00147] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000063_0002
, or a salt thereof.
[00148] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds the following formulae:
,
Figure imgf000063_0003
and salts thereof. [00149] In certain embodiments, a provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
,
Figure imgf000064_0001
or a salt thereof.
[00150] In certain embodiments, a provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000064_0002
or a salt thereof. [00151] Also provided herein are compound of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000066_0001
, and salts thereof, wherein:
R1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
[00152] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000066_0002
,
or a salt thereof.
[00153] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000066_0003
,
or a salt thereof. [00154] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000068_0001
,
or a salt thereof .
[00155] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the formula:
Figure imgf000068_0002
,
or a salt thereof.
[00156] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the formula:
Figure imgf000068_0003
,
or a salt thereof.
[00157] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
,
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000070_0002
or a salt thereof .
[00158] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000070_0001
69/126
U1195.70042WO00
Figure imgf000071_0001
[00159] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000072_0001
,
or a salt thereof.
[00160] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000072_0002
,
or a salt thereof.
[00161] In certain embodiments, the provided compound is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000072_0003
,
or a salt thereof. [00162] In certain embodiments, the provided compound us of the following formula:
Figure imgf000073_0001
,
or a salt thereof.
[00163] Furthermore, all compounds disclosed in the Examples below are part of the present invention and are provided herein as compounds.
[00164] Also provided herein are kits comprising one or more compounds provided herein; optionally one or more reagents provided herein; and optionally instructions for use. In certain embodiments, the kit comprises one or more glycosyl donors, one or more glycosyl acceptors; optionally a chemical oxidant (e.g., PIFA); and optionally instructions for use. EXAMPLES
Glycosylation of organic compounds
[00165] For use in glycosylation reactions, a simple hydroquinone was prepared from the commercially available natural product arbutin 14. The tetra-O-benzyl derivative 15 was selected and, using isopropanol as a simple nucleophile, a variety of oxidants were studied in the glycosylation reaction. A select set of these is shown in Table 1. As can be seen in entry 1, oxidants like CAN indeed provide the desired product, answering the question of whether a different oxidant can be employed. However, it was vital to find an inexpensive, commercially available 2-electron oxidant that would be easy to use straight from the bottle and produce byproducts that were straightforward to remove. While there are a variety of two electron oxidants available, attention was focused on hypervalent iodine reagents, as they would meet the aforementioned criteria.
Furthermore, there is ample literature precedent for I(III)-reagents
like(diacetoxyiodo)benzene to oxidize phenols to a variety of products. As shown,
(bis(trifluoroacetoxy)iodo)benzene (PhI(OTFA)2; also“PIFA”) yielded 16 in 55% yield after 15 minutes (entry 3). The reaction is quenched with aqueous bicarbonate solution, which efficiently removes the TFA byproduct and iodobenzene and benzoquinone are removed during workup and in vacuo. In short, this is a very easy reaction to perform. Table 1. Screening Experiments
Figure imgf000074_0002
[00166] It is noteworthy that glycosyl donors with different auxiliaries were unsuccessful under these conditions. For instance, the reaction shows in the scheme below did not produce the desired product shown.
Figure imgf000074_0001
[00167] Next, it was important to know whether this strategy will enable a latent form of the reagent to be utilized as the glycosyl acceptor. The proper control experiments were needed to determine if the reactivity could be influenced by simply substituting the phenol, as predicted in Scheme 2. To do this a benzoyl substituent was chosen. A benzoyl group (an electron-withdrawing group) may help reduce the propensity for oxidation in this regard, but more importantly, can be removed to reveal the active reagent. The benzoyl substituted compound 17 was prepared from 15 and exposed to the reaction conditions determined in Table 1. After a 15 minute reaction time (same as Table 1), the latent reagent 17 remained untouched. No consumption of the reagent was observed under prolonged reaction times and even addition of TFA (which the latent form will need to tolerate as it is produced in the oxidation of the active form) did not affect 17. As seen in Scheme 2, 95% of 17 was recovered after 6 h, which is 24 times the reaction time (15 min) developed above. Simple benzoyl protection prevents oxidation with PIFA. Scheme 2
Figure imgf000075_0001
[00168] Missing from 17 is a free hydroxyl group to act as an acceptor in glycosylation reactions. A free hydroxyl was incorporated in 18 and the reaction was run under standard reaction conditions (Scheme 3; PIFA, acetonitrile, 15 min at room temperature). Exactly the desired reaction occurred, providing 19 in 75% yield as a 3:1 mixture of anomers, favoring the beta anomer. This stereoselectivity is what should be expected from the all benzyl substrate 17, in agreement with numerous reports using other triggering strategies (see, e.g., Crich, D.“Mechanism of a Chemical Glycosylation Reaction” Acc. Chem. Res.2010, 43, 1144-1153). Scheme 3
Figure imgf000075_0002
[00169] Given that these reagents are solids, the reaction procedures are simple. Using the reaction of 17 and 18 as an example, the solid reagents are added to the flask and a rubber septum put in place before acetonitrile is added. Solid PIFA is then added in one portion (septum removed and poured in) and in 15 minutes the reaction is worked up with aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The solvent quality does not have to be very high, and may contain water. These experiments unequivocally demonstrated that the reactivity concept can and does work and that the reagents are easy to handle, shelf stable solids that are readily employed using simple procedures. With reagents such as 17 in hand, the scope was briefly explored (Table 2). It should be noted that, in addition to a glucose derived reagent, mannose- and galactose-based reagents were also prepared and employed, giving 22 and 23, respectively. TBS groups were also used to protect the glucose-based reagent (compound pictured in Figure 4) to give 24, and other disaccharides such as 25 could be formed. The α:β anomeric ratios observed are in agreement with many related substrates (Bn-protected glucose derivatives) using a variety of methods. (see, e.g., Crich, D.“Mechanism of a Chemical Glycosylation Reaction” Acc. Chem. Res.2010, 43, 1144-1153). Table 2
Figure imgf000076_0001
[00170] To address stereoselectivity, a 2-O-Bz protecting group was included on the mannose substrate instead of 2-O-Bn, resulting in 27 (Scheme 4). Under standard conditions with isopropanol as a nucleophile, 28 was obtained in 22% yield, but with >25:1 selectivity favoring the alpha-anomer, solving the selectivity problem. Use of additives was explored with the rationale that they may help the ionization to form the oxonium ion and increase reactivity. The Lewis acid BF3•OEt2 restored reactivity, and 29 was isolated in 77% yield, again in >25:1 anomeric selectivity. The same substrate control element could be incorporated in glucose and the corresponding reagent 30 was prepared and tested with 18 as nucleophile. In the event, the disaccharide 31 was produced in 81% yield and >25:1 diastereoselectivity, favoring the beta-anomer. Changing the 2-O-Bn group to a 2-O-Bz group was a critical change that achieved greatly improved anomeric stereoselectivity. Scheme 4
Figure imgf000077_0001
[00171] A variety of different types of building blocks are important, including amino sugar derivatives. Before using BF3•OEt2 as an additive, the N-phthalimido glucose derivative 32 was prepared and used it with the original conditions. The reactions were highly selective, providing essentially one diastereomer (Scheme 5). These results demonstrate that using this new oxidative strategy, stereoselectivity can be controlled by directing groups on the substrate. Scheme 5
Figure imgf000078_0001
[00172] Using the improved conditions with 15 and 35, the disaccharide 26 was obtained in 81% yield (Scheme 6). For comparison, without BF3•OEt2, the reaction had to be heated to 60 °C and then 26 was obtained in 63%. These results show that the glycosyl acceptor can be a secondary alcohol on a sugar backbone– a critical result that will allow for the building of diverse glycans. Scheme 6
Figure imgf000078_0002
[00173] For the construction of polysaccharides and complex glycans, a set of common building block materials and for use in iterative glycosylation reactions is essential. Using this pragmatic tenet, a variety of glycosyl donors have been prepared. As can be seen in Scheme 7, the method is straightforward and applies standard chemistry. The strategy was to prepare the trichloroacetimidates and then convert them to the hydroquinone adducts, which have all been stable solids. Following this general route, donors 15, 40-42, and 32 have been prepared. Scheme 7
Figure imgf000079_0001
[00174] An important feature of this invention is use of these compounds in an iterative process, capitalizing on the active/latent properties designed into the system. The next goal was to use the 2-O-benzoyl reagent 48 with a free C6 hydroxyl group as acceptor (Scheme 8), since it contains a latent glycosyl donor (which can be uncovered after the removal of the phenolic benzoyl group).
Scheme 8
Figure imgf000080_0001
[00175] Compound 48 was prepared from glucal 43. Acceptor 48 can react with 30 under the conditions established above (Scheme 4) followed by selective benzoyl deprotection with ethanolamine to yield 50 (Scheme 9; (a) PIFA, BF3•OEt2, CH3CN; (b) ethanolamine, THF). Note that 30 was prepared from 49 under these deacylation conditions. Simple two-step sequences will then sequentially add monosaccharides to the chain to build the linear carbohydrate. These types of iterative glycosylations are provided and described herein. Scheme 9
Figure imgf000080_0002
[00176] A set of common monosaccharide building blocks are needed to prepare both branched and linear glycan structures. It is important to have a protecting group strategy that is common to all reagents to allow them to be used in a mix-and-match approach. The prevalent motif observed in carbohydrate oligomers is for each monosaccharide in the chain to have two or three points of attachment to the neighboring residues (one for terminal branches). When distilled down, every building block needs to have four types of protecting groups: (1) anomeric protection; (2) protecting groups that will only be removed in a global deprotection step at the end of the sequence; (3) a single temporary protecting group; and (4) no protecting group– a free glycosyl acceptor. One strategy provided herein is as follows: Benzyl groups will be utilized to protect alcohols that will be revealed in the final step; Fmoc groups will be used to protect alcohols that will be immediately revealed after glycosylation to act as glycosyl acceptors to introduce branching; Free hydroxyl groups will be revealed directly before use in glycosylation reactions and will largely be protected as silyl ethers during preparation of the building blocks (Scheme 8).
[00177] Seeberger has used an informatics approach to identify the most common building blocks needed to access the largest majority of known mammalian glycans (Seeberger, P. H. “The Logic of Automated Glycan Assembly”, Acc. Chem. Res.2015, 48, 1450-1463; Werz, D. B.; Ranzinger, R.; Herget, S.; Adibekian, A.; Von der Lieth, C-W.; Seeberger, P. H. “Exploring the Structural Diversity of Mammalian Carbohydrates (‘Glycospace’) by Statistical Databank Analysis”, ACS Chem. Bio.2007, 2, 685-691; Adibekian, A.;
Stallforth, P.; Hecht, L.-M.; Werz, D. B.; Gagneux, P.; Seeberger, P. H.“Comparative bioinformatics analysis of the mammalian and bacterial glycomes,” Chem. Sci.2011, 2, 337– 344). Table 3 shows a set of building blocks for use in the present invention, categorized by monosaccharide type. These molecules are latent donors and can be fed into the reaction as acceptors to be glycosylated at the free hydroxyl groups. It is to be understood that all of these compounds can be protected at the free hydroxyl group (with a hydroxyl protecting group) and treated with ethanolamine to produce the corresponding donor molecules. The building blocks are broken up by monosaccharide and it can be seen that there are clearly more prevalent substitution patterns for some types than others. In Table 3, OAr is OC6H4p- OBz.
Table 3
Figure imgf000082_0001
[00178] The synthesis of 32a begins from the known phthalimide 56 (See, e.g., Ferrier, R. J.; Hay, R. W.; Vethaviyasar, N.“A potential versatile synthesis of Glycosides,” Carbohydr. Res.1973, 27, 55–61). Protection as the acetal and benzylation of the free hydroxyl group will provide 58 (see, e.g., Nakano, T.; Ito, Y.; Ogawa, T.“Total synthesis of a sulfated glucuronyl glycosphingolipid, IV3GlcA(3- SO3)nLcOse Cer, a carbohydrate epitope of neural cell adhesion molecules”, Tetrahedron Lett.1990, 31, 1597-1600). Oxidative deprotection and introduction of the hydroquinone using the trichloroacetimidate method should afford 60 (see, e.g., Komarova, B.S.; Orekhova, M.V.; Tsvetkov, Y.E.; Nifantiev, N.E. Is an acyl group at O-3 in glucosyl donors able to control α-stereoselectivity of glycosylation? The role of conformational mobility and the protecting group at O-6”, Carb. Res.2014, 384, 70-76. Introduction of the benzoyl group and reductive acetal opening with trifluoroacetic acid and triethylsilane will then give 32a (see, e.g.,“DeNinno, M.P.; Etienne, J.B.; Duplantier, K.C. A method for the selective reduction of carbohydrate 4,6-O- benzylidene acetals”, Tetrahedron Lett.1995, 36, 669-672. The synthesis of 53a will begin from commercially available galactal 61. Selective protection of the primary hydroxyl group as the TBS silyl ether and benzyl protection of the free alcohols will then provide 62 (see, e.g., Paquette, L.A.; Oplinger, J.A.“Synthesis of a structurally modified gl cal. (-)- (2R,4S)-2-Methyl-2-vinyl-4-(benzyloxy)-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran”, J. Org. Chem.1988, 53, 2953–2959. Dihydroxylation followed by benzoylation and selective cleavage of the anomeric benzoyl group should then yield 64. The hydroquinone will be introduced using the Schmidt method followed by benzoylation of the phenolic hydroxyl group and deprotection of the TBS group using TBAF to provide the target molecule 53a (see, e.g., Schmidt, R. R.; Michel, J.“Facile Synthesis of α- and β-O-Glycosyl Imidates; Preparation of Glycosides and Disaccharides”, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed.1980, 19, 731–732). Scheme 10
Figure imgf000083_0001
Scheme 11
Figure imgf000083_0002
Synthetic Procedures
General Information
[00179] All reactions were carried out under an atmosphere of nitrogen unless otherwise specified. Anhydrous solvents were transferred via syringe to flame-dried glassware, which had been cooled under a stream of dry nitrogen. Anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile, diethyl ether, dichloromethane, toluene, dimethylformamide (DMF) were dried using an mBraun solvent purification system. Analytical thin layer chromatography (TLC) was performed using 250 µm Silica Gel 60 F254 pre-coated plates. Flash column
chromatography was performed using 230-400 Mesh 60A Silica Gel. Proton nuclear magnetic resonance (1H NMR) spectra were recorded using Varian Unity Inova 500 MHz. Chemical shifts (δ) are reported in parts per million (ppm) downfield relative to
tetramethylsilane (TMS, 0.0 ppm) or CDCl3 (7.26 ppm). Coupling constants (J) are reported in Hz. Multiplicities are reported using the following abbreviations: s, singlet; d, doublet; t, triplet; q, quartet; p, pentet; m, multiplet; b, broad; Carbon-13 nuclear magnetic resonance (13C NMR) spectra were recorded using a Varian Unity Inova 500 MHz at 125 MHz.
Chemical shifts are reported in ppm relative to the carbon resonance of CDCl3 (77.23 ppm). Specific Optical rotations were obtained on a JASCD P - 2000 Series Polarimeter
(wavelength = 589 nm). High-resolution mass spectra (HRMS) were obtained by Mass Spectrometry Core Laboratory of University of Florida, and are reported as m/z (relative ratio). The Instrument ionization source was coupled to the instrument for DART-TOF analysis. Accurate m/z are reported for the molecular ion [M+Na]+. α-Arbutin was purchased from Chem-Impex International, Inc. [Bis(trifluoroacetoxy)iodo]benzene was purchased from Oakwood Chemical. (1R,2S,5R)-(−)-Menthol was purchased from Sigma-Aldrich. All purchased reagents were used without further purification. Preparation of glycosyl donor precursors
[00180] The following compounds were prepared as reported in the literature (see, e.g., Matwiejuk, M.; Thiem, J. Eur. J. Org. Chem.2011, 5860–5878; Lunau, N.; Meier, C. Eur. J. Org. Chem.2012, 6260–6270; Chiara, J. L.; García, A.; Cristóbal-Lumbroso, G. J. Org. Chem.2005, 70 , 4142–4151; Sanapala, S. R.; Kulkarni, S. S. Chem. Eur. J.2014, 20, 3578– 3583; Qian, S.; Chen, Q. L.; Guan, J. L.; Wu, Y.; Wang, Z. Y. Chem. Pharm. Bull.2014, 62, 779–785):
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
General procedure for synthesis of glycosyl donors
To a stirred solution of a donor precursor (0.2 M) in CH2Cl2 was added K2CO3 (1 equiv.). After 30 minutes trichloroacetonitrile (10 equiv.) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature. After 12 hours the resulting mixture was filtrated through a pad of Celite®, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. To the resulting oil, hydroquinone (10 equiv.) was added at room temperature, followed by a mixture CH2Cl2: Et2O (1:1, v:v). The reaction mixture was cooled at 0ºC and stirred for 30 min. BF3·OEt2 (0.1 equiv.) was then added dropwise and the reaction mixture was allowed to stirred overnight at room temperature. The solution was concentrated under reduced pressure; the resulting mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2, washed with a saturated aqueous solution of K2CO3, water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (15% EtOAc/hexane).
Figure imgf000085_0002
[00181] The above compound was prepared in 73% yield (1:6, α:β) as white solid. All data matched reported literature. See, e.g., Wang, Z. X.; et al. Carbohydr. Res.2006, 341, 1945– 1947.
Figure imgf000085_0003
[00182] The above compound was prepared in 70% yield (α only) as white solid. MP = 112.1-114.7 °C; Rf = 0.60 (30% EtOAc /hexane); [α]23
D = +37.3 (c 1.0, acetone); IR (ATR) = 3370, 1508, 1210, 1088, 732, 695 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.39 (m, 18H), 7.17 (m, 2H), 6.88 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.69 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 5.45 (d, J = 2.0 Hz, 1H), 4.90 (d, J = 10.7 Hz, 1H), 4.78 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, 2H), 4.69 (d, J = 3.8 Hz, 2H), 4.63 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 4.54 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.46 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 4.09 (dd, J = 5.1, 1.8 Hz, 2H), 3.95 (s, 1H), 3.90 (dp, J = 7.0, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 3.79 (dd, J = 11.0, 4.8 Hz, 1H), 3.69 (dd, J = 11.0, 1.9 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 151.1, 150.6, 138.79, 138.75, 138.6, 138.5, 128.8, 128.73, 128.72, 128.66, 128.62, 128.59, 128.3, 128.2, 128.1, 128.03, 127.97, 127.95, 127.8, 118.4, 116.3, 97.5, 80.3, 75.5, 75.1, 75.0, 73.6, 73.1, 72.7, 72.6, 69.4. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ Cacld for C40H40O7655.2666; Found 655.2639.
Figure imgf000086_0001
[00183] The above compound was prepared in 67% yield (mixture of α, β anomers) as white solid.
Figure imgf000086_0002
[00184] The above compound was prepared in 58% yield (>25:1, β:α) as a low melting point solid; Rf = 0.42 (30% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = +48.1 (c 1.0, acetone); IR (ATR) = 3391, 1774, 1707, 1508, 1207, 1051, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.84-7.60 (m, 4H), 7.41-7.21 (m, 10H), 7.05-6.94 (m, 2H), 6.91-6.82 (m, 3H), 6.77-6.71 (m, 2H), 6.60-6.50 (m, 2H), 5.71-5.55 (m, 1H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.86 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 4.81 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1H), 4.68-4.60 (m, 2H), 4.56 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1H), 4.46 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1H), 4.44-4.38 (m, 2H), 3.93-3.67 (m, 4H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 151.6, 151.2, 138.4, 138.21, 138.19, 134.16, 128.8, 128.7, 128.4, 128.31, 128.27, 128.2, 128.1, 128.0, 127.7, 123.7, 119.2, 116.5, 116.1, 98.0, 79.9, 79.5, 75.6, 75.4, 75.2, 73.8, 68.9, 56.2. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ Cacld for C41H37O8N 694.2411; Found 694.2379.
Figure imgf000087_0001
[00185] The above compound was prepared in 68% yield (>25:1, α:β) as white solid. MP = 140.8-142.1 °C; Rf = 0.50 (25% EtOAc/hexane); [α]22
D = +46.0 (c 1.0, acetone); IR (ATR) = 3345, 1774, 1707, 1508, 1207, 1051, 695 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.09 (dt, J = 8.2, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 7.56 (td, J = 7.4, 1.3 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (s, 17H), 6.90 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.68 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 5.77 (dt, J = 3.1, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 5.54 (d, J = 2.0 Hz, 1H), 5.18 (s, 1H), 4.90 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.84 (d, J = 11.4 Hz, 1H), 4.67 (dd, J = 22.9, 11.6 Hz, 2H), 4.56 (d, J = 10.7 Hz, 1H), 4.48 (d, J = 11.9 Hz, 1H), 4.30 (ddd, J = 9.3, 3.2, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 4.19 (td, J = 9.7, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 4.07-3.96 (m, 1H), 3.88 (dd, J = 11.0, 3.8 Hz, 1H), 3.74 (dd, J = 10.8, 2.0 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 166.22, 166.21, 151.49, 151.47, 150.2, 138.59, 138.58, 138.2, 133.63, 130.4, 130.0, 128.8, 128.73, 128.69, 128.67, 128.39, 128.36, 128.34, 128.0, 127.91, 127.87, 118.3, 116.4, 97.2, 78.4, 75.7, 74.5, 73.7, 72.4, 72.1, 69.3, 69.2. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ Cacld for C40H38O8669.2459; Found 669.2475
Figure imgf000087_0002
[00186] The above compound was prepared in 63% yield (>25:1, β:α) as white solid. MP = 155.5-157.1 °C; Rf = 0.30 (25% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = +21.4 (c 1.0, acetone); IR (ATR) = 3274, 1724, 1509, 1220, 1055, 1052, 709, 695 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.01 (ddd, J = 8.5, 2.5, 1.3 Hz, 2H), 7.62-7.55 (m, 1H), 7.43 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.33-7.10 (m, 15H), 6.85 (ddd, J = 7.8, 3.8, 1.7 Hz, 2H), 6.63 (ddd, J = 8.9, 4.5, 1.7 Hz, 2H), 5.58-5.41 (m, 1H), 4.96-4.94 (m, 1H), 4.86-4.82 (m, 1H), 4.78-4.74 (m, 1H), 4.68 (dd, J = 11.6, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 4.64-4.54 (m, 4H), 3.88 (td, J = 9.0, 3.6 Hz, 1H), 3.84-3.79 (m, 2H), 3.73 (dd, J = 10.8, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (dtd, J = 9.1, 4.0, 1.9 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.6, 151.7, 138.3, 138.1, 138.00, 133.5, 130.13, 130.12, 130.08, 128.80, 128.75, 128.72, 128.69, 128.6, 128.5, 128.4, 128.2, 128.12, 128.10, 128.03, 128.00, 119.3, 116.2, 101.2, 83.0, 78.2, 75.7, 75.4, 74.03, 74.02, 73.9, 69.1. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ Cacld for C40H38O8669.2459; Found 669.2434.
Figure imgf000088_0001
[00187] 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.28– 8.16 (m, 2H), 7.71– 7.62 (m, 1H), 7.55 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.41– 7.19 (m, 20H), 7.16 (s, 4H), 5.07 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 5.03– 5.00 (m, 1H), 4.98 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 4.90– 4.81 (m, 3H), 4.68– 4.52 (m, 3H), 3.87– 3.69 (m, 5H), 3.63 (ddd, J = 9.4, 5.0, 1.9 Hz, 1H).13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.4, 155.1, 146.0, 138.5, 138.2, 138.1, 138.0, 133.6, 130.17, 130.17, 129.58, 128.58, 128.43, 128.41, 128.39, 128.37, 128.24, 128.0127.9, 127.82, 127.81, 127.76, 127.67, 127.62, 122.58, 117.9, 102.1, 84.7, 82.0, 77.7, 75.8, 75.2, 75.11, 75.07, 73.5, 68.8. Preparation of glycosyl donors
Scheme 12
Figure imgf000088_0002
Procedures for Scheme 12
Figure imgf000089_0001
[00188] To a stirred solution of Arbutin (20 mmol, 5.4 g) in DMF (20 mL) was added anhydrous K2CO3 (24 mmol, 5.5 g) and allyl bromide (24 mmol, 2.9 g) at room temperature. After 24h the reaction was filtrated, the solvent was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to afford the title compound as a white solid (quantitative yield, 6.2 g). MP = 142-144ºC; Rf = 0.56 (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2); [α] 22
D = -48.94 (c 0.5, acetone); IR (neat) : 3370, 1510, 1229, 1076, 1022, 822 cm-1 ; 1H NMR (500 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 7.04 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.88 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.07 (ddt, J = 16.3, 10.5, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 5.41 (d, J = 17.3 Hz, 1H), 5.25 (d, J = 10.5 Hz, 1H), 4.85 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H), 4.64 (s, 1H), 4.54 (d, J = 4.9 Hz, 2H), 4.47 (s, 1H), 4.38 (s, 1H), 3.91 (d, J=10.0 Hz, 1H), 3.78-3.72 (m, 2H), 3.56-3.45 (m, 4H).13C NMR (125 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 153.9, 152.1, 134.1, 117.9, 116.3, 115.3, 102.1, 77.1, 76.8, 73.8, 70.5, 68.8, 61.8. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C15H20O7335.1101; Found 335.1091.
Figure imgf000089_0002
[00189] To a stirred solution of 12-A in pyridine (20mL) was added TBSCl (20 mmol, 3 g) and DMAP (2 mmol, 0.24 g) at 0ºC. The reaction was warmed up to room temperature and stirred for 10h. The solution was quenched with H2O (60 mL) the product was extracted with CH2Cl2 (3x20 mL). The organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to afford the title compound as a colorless solid (6.39 g, 75% yield). MP = 111-113 ºC; Rf = 0.68 (5% MeOH/CH2Cl 22
2); [α]D = -57.1 (c 0.5, acetone); IR (neat) = 3433, 2929, 1641, 1505, 1215, 1109, 1062, 847, 776 cm-1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 6.99 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 6.76 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 6.04 (ddt, J = 17.3, 10.5, 5.3 Hz, 1H), 5.44-5.24 (m, 3H), 4.79-4.66 (m, 2H), 4.50-4.40 (m, 3H), 3.92 (dd, J = 10.9, 3.2 Hz, 1H), 3.77 (dd, J = 10.5, 6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.68 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.53 (m, 1H), 3.42 (m, 1H), 0.89 (s, 9H), 0.04 (d, J = 10.5 Hz, 6H).13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 154.3, 151.4, 133.5, 118.5, 117.5, 115.4, 101.6, 76.5, 75.8, 75.7, 73.3, 71.4, 71.3, 69.3, 63.7, 25.9, 18.3, -5.3, -5.4. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C21H34O7Si 449.1966; Found 449.1955.
Figure imgf000090_0001
[00190] To a stirred solution of 12-B (15 mmol, 6.39 g) in DMF (100 mL) was added NaH (45 mmol) (60% dispersion in mineral oil) portionwise at 0ºC. The suspension was stirred for 1h at 0ºC followed by addition of Benzyl bromide (66 mmol, 1.4 mL). The reaction was warmed up to room temperature and stirred for 14h. The solution was cooled down to 0ºC and quenched with slow addition of H2O (30 mL). The product was extracted with Hexane (3x 50 mL). The organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (5%
EtOAc/hexane) to afford the title compound as colorless oil (9.0 g, 87 % yield). Rf = 0.7 (20% EtOAc/hexane); [α] 22
D = -8.7 (c 0.5, CH2Cl2); IR(neat) = 2952, 1643, 1505.1211, 1069, 835, 778, 734, 697 cm-1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.39-7.30 (m, 15H), 7.05 (d, J = 9Hz, 2H), 6.85 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 6.07 (ddt, J = 17.3, 10.6, 5.3 Hz, 1H), 5.42 (dq, J = 17.0, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 5.30 (dq, J = 10.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 5.08 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 4.96 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.91-4.84 (m, 4H), 4.70 (d, J = 11Hz, 1H), 4.52 (dt, J = 5.4, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 3.89 (dd, J = 11.3, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 3.81-3.62 (m, 4H), 3.42 (ddd, J = 9.6, 5.1, 1.7, 1H), 0.93 (s, 9H), 0.07 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 6H).13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 154.3, 151.8, 138.6, 138.4, 138.3, 133.5, 128.5, 128.44, 128.43, 128.2, 128.1, 128.0, 127.9, 127.75, 127.71, 118.7, 117.6, 115.5, 103.0, 84.7, 82.3, 77.6, 76.1, 75.9, 75.1, 75.1, 69.4, 62.3, 25.9, 18.3, -5.1, -5.3. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C42H52O7Si 719.3375; Found 719.3343.
Figure imgf000090_0002
[00191] To a stirred solution of 12-C (13 mmol, 9.0 g) in methanol (65 mL) was added anhydrous K2CO3 (60 mmol, 8 g) and Pd(Ph3)4 (0.26 mmol, 300 mg) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24h then filtrated through celite, the solvent was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (20% EtOAc/hexane) to afford the title compound as colorless solid (5.9 g, 70% yield). MP = 76-79 ºC; Rf = 0.29 (20% EtOAc/hexane); [α] 22
D = - 17.4 (c 0.5, CH2Cl2); IR(neat) = 3418, 1651, 1509, 1455, 1359, 1212, 1067, 835, 777, 737, 698 cm-1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.40-7.31 (m, 15H), 6.80 (d. J = 9 Hz, 2H), 6.70 (d, J = 9 Hz, 2H), 5.08 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 5.03 (s, 1H), 4.97 (d, J = 10.5 Hz, 1H), 4.90 (d, J = 11 Hz, 1H), 4.87-4.84 (m, 3H), 4.71 (d, J = 11 Hz, 1H), 3.89 (dd, J =11.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.81- 3.77 (m, 1H), 3.75 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 1H), 3.71-3.63 (m, 2H), 3.42 (ddd, J = 9.6, 5.0, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 0.93 (s, 9H), 0.07 (d, J =15.5 Hz, 6H). 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 151.7, 151.2, 138.5, 138.4, 138.2, 128.52, 128.46, 128.2, 128.11, 128.06, 127.9, 127.8, 127.7, 118.9, 115.9, 103.1, 84.7, 82.3, 77.6, 77.3, 77.1, 76.8, 76.1, 75.9, 75.1, 62.4, 25.9, 18.4, -5.1, -5.3. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C39H48O7Si 679.3062; Found 679.3081.
Figure imgf000091_0001
[00192] To a stirred solution of 12-D (9.1 mmol, 5.9 g) in CH2Cl2 (50 mL) was added Et3N (30 mmol, 4.5 mL) and BzCl (9.1 mmol, 1.1 mL) at room temperature. After 1h the reaction was washed with H2O (3x20 mL). The orgranic layers were dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column
chromatography (5% EtOAc/hexane) to afford the title compound as colorless oil (5.5 g, 80% yield). Rf = 0.9 (20% EtOAc/hexane). [α] 22
D = -3.4 (c 0.4, CH2Cl2); IR(neat) = 1739, 1504, 1264, 1193, 1064, 836, 781, 735, 698 cm-1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.25 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 2H), 7.67 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.42-7.33 (m, 15H), 7.18 (s, 4H), 5.11 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 5.02-4.97 (m, 2H), 4.93 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 4.89 (dd, J = 11.0, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 4.74 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 3.94 (dd, J = 11.3, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 3.86-3.72 (m, 3H), 3.69 (t, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 3.49 (ddd, J = 9.7, 5.1, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 0.95 (s, 9H), 0.09 (d, J = 14 Hz, 6H).13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.4, 155.4, 146.1, 138.6, 138.4, 138.3, 133.6, 130.2, 129.6, 128.6, 128.5, 128.49, 128.48128.2, 128.09, 128.06, 127.9, 127.83, 127.76, 122.6, 118.3, 102.5, 84.7, 82.3, 77.6, 77.4, 77.1, 76.9, 76.3, 75.9, 75.2, 75.1, 62.3, 25.9, 18.4, -5.1, - 5.3. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C46H52O8Si 783.3324; Found 783.3312.
Figure imgf000092_0001
[00193] Compound 12-E (7.2 mmol, 5.5 g) was suspended in MeOH (35 mL) followed by catalytic amount of p-TsOH at room temperature. The suspension was stirred until full conversion of the starting material. The reaction concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (EtOAc/hexane: 4/2) to afford the title product as a white solid (4.3g, 92 % yield). MP = 114-117; Rf = 0.6 ( 20% EtOAc/hexane); [α] 22
D = -12.1(c 0.5, CH2Cl2); IR(neat) = 3422, 1732, 1645, 1506, 1455, 1270, 1246, 1195, 1065, 1025 cm-1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.21 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 2H), 7.65 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.38-7.30 (m, 15H), 7.17 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 2H), 7.09 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 2H), 5.07 (d, J = 7.5 Hz, 1H), 5.03 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 1H), 4.98 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 4.92-4.83 (m, 3H), 4.70-4.68 (m, 2H), 3.93-3.89 (m, 1H), 3.80-3.65 (m, 4H), 3.52 (ddd, J = 9.7, 4.7, 2.7 Hz, 1 H).13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.4, 154.8, 146.1, 138.4, 138.0, 137.8, 133.6, 130.2, 129.4, 128.6, 128.5, 128.5, 128.4, 128.2, 128.1, 128.0, 127.9, 127.9, 127.7, 126.9, 122.8, 117.6, 101.8, 84.4, 81.9, 77.2, 75.8, 75.4, 75.2, 75.2, 61.9. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C40H38O8669.2459; Found 669.2449. Scheme 13
Figure imgf000092_0002
Procedures for Scheme 13
Figure imgf000093_0001
[00194] To a stirred solution of arbutin (10 mmol, 2.7 g) in DMF (10 mL) was added benzaldehyde dimethyl acetal (12 mmol, 1.8 mL) and a catalytic amount of p-TsOH at room temperature. The reaction is heated up to 70 ºC and stirred for 14 h. H2O (30 mL) was then added, the white precipitate was filtrated and dried under vacuum to afford the title product as a white solid (3.0, 84 % yield). MP: 247-248 ºC Rf: 0.6 (50% Acetone/hexane), [α]21
D -40.3 (c 0.60, acetone); MP: 247.1-248.5 °C; IR (ATR) 3336, 1509, 1376, 1215, 1081, 1016, 748, 695 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.64-7.46 (m, 2H), 7.47-7.33 (m, 3H), 7.09-6.90 (m, 2H), 6.92-6.68 (m, 2H), 5.67 (s, 1H), 5.00 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H), 4.80 (d, J = 4.3 Hz, 1H), 4.70 (d, J = 3.9 Hz, 1H), 4.32 (dd, J = 10.3, 4.7 Hz, 1H), 3.99-3.71 (m, 2H), 3.71-3.54 (m, 3H).13C NMR (125 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 153.3, 151.4, 138.7, 129.1, 128.4, 126.9, 118.7, 116.0, 103.2, 101.8, 81.4, 75.3, 74.0, 68.8, 66.8. HRMS (ESI) m/z:[M+Na]+ cacld for C19H20O7383.1101; Found 383.1191.
Figure imgf000093_0002
[00195] To a stirred solution of 13-A (2 mmol, 0.97 g) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added Et3N (18 mmol, 2.6 mL) and Ac2O (9 mmol, 0.9 mL) at room temperature. After 5 h the reaction was washed with H2O (3x20 mL). The orgranic layers were dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column
chromatography (10% EtOAc/Hexane) to afford the title compound as a white solid (1.7 g, 87% yield). MP = 191-193 ºC; Rf = 0.53 (50% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = -34.3 (c 1.2,
CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) 1747, 1503, 1365, 1216, 1188, 971, 763, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.62-7.39 (m, 2H), 7.40-7.28 (m, 3H), 7.08– 6.95 (m, 4H), 5.53 (s, 1H), 5.40 (t, J = 9.4 Hz, 1H), 5.26 (dd, J = 9.2, 7.7 Hz, 1H), 5.14 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H), 4.40 (dd, J = 10.6, 4.9 Hz, 1H), 3.82 (dt, J = 12.8, 9.9 Hz, 2H), 3.65 (td, J = 9.7, 4.9 Hz, 1H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.12-2.00 (m, 6H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 170.4, 167.0, 169.9, 154.7, 146.6, 137.0, 129.5, 128.6, 126.48, 126.47, 122.9, 118.3, 101.9, 100.3, 78.4, 72.4, 72.0, 68.8, 66.9, 21.4, 21.1, 21.00. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C25H26O10509.1418; Found 509.1428.
Figure imgf000094_0001
[00196] To a stirred solution of 13-B (1 mmol, 0.49 g) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) was added Et3SiH (6 mmol, 0.95 mL) followed by slow addition of TFA (6 mmol, 0.46 mL) at 0 ºC. The reaction was stirred at 0 ºC for 30 min, heated up to room temperature and stirred for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (10 mL) and washed with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3 (3x10 mL). The organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (1/1 EtOAc/hexane) to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.39 g, 81% yield). Rf = 0.39 (1/1 EtOAc/hexane), [α] 21
D = -24.6 (c 1.0, CH2Cl2). IR (ATR) = 1747, 1503, 1365, 1216, 1188, 971, 763, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.32 (m, 5H), 7.04-7.96 (m, 4H), 5.23-5.10 (m, 2H), 5.03 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H), 4.63-4.52 (q, J = 12.0, 21.0 Hz, 2H), 3.86-3.73 (m, 3H), 3.67 (dt, J = 9.4, 4.5 Hz, 1H), 3.32 (s, 1H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.10 (s, 3H), 2.06 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.2, 169.8, 169.7, 154.6, 145.9, 137.7, 128.5, 127.9, 127.7, 122.5, 117.8, 99.3, 75.6, 74.9, 73.7, 71.3, 70.0, 69.6, 21.1, 20.9, 20.7. HRMS (ESI) m/z:[M+Na]+ cacld for C25H28O10511.1575; Found 511.1559.
Scheme 14
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000095_0002
Procedures for Scheme 14
[00197] To a stirred solution of 13-A (10 mmol, 3.60 g) in DMF (20 mL) was added K2CO3 (14 mmol, 1.92 g) and allyl bromide (14 mmol, 1.19 mL) at room temperature. After 24 hours the reaction was quenched with H2O (100 mL). The white precipitate was collected through vacuum filtration, washed with H2O (2x50 mL) and dried under vacuum to afford the title compound as a white solid (3.80 g, 95%). MP = 176.5-178.7 °C; Rf = 0.37 (50%
Acetone/hexane); [α]24
D = -32.7 (c 1.0, acetone); IR (ATR) = 3361, 1658, 1506, 1081, 1013, 820, 730, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 7.55-7.48 (m, 2H), 7.47-7.35 (m, 3H), 7.14-6.98 (m, 2H), 6.96-6.80 (m, 2H), 6.07 (ddt, J = 17.2, 10.5, 5.3 Hz, 1H), 5.59 (s, 1H), 5.43 (dq, J = 17.2, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (dq, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 4.94 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H), 4.53 (dt, J = 5.3, 1.6 Hz, 2H), 4.40 (dd, J = 10.5, 4.9 Hz, 1H), 3.94 (td, J = 9.1, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 3.85 (t, J = 10.3 Hz, 1H), 3.79 (ddd, J = 9.0, 7.7, 2.7 Hz, 1H), 3.67 (t, J = 9.3 Hz, 1H), 3.58 (ddd, J = 9.9, 9.3, 5.0 Hz, 1H), 2.86 (d, J = 2.3 Hz, 1H), 2.77 (d, J = 2.8 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 154.8, 152.5, 138.9, 134.7, 129.3, 128.5, 127.0, 118.6, 117.0, 115.9, 103.1, 101.9, 81.5, 75.4, 74.1, 69.5, 69.0, 66.9. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C22H24O7423.1414; Found 423.1393.
Figure imgf000096_0001
[00198] A mixture of 14-A (2.5 mmol, 1.0 g), n-Bu2SnO (2.94 mmol, 731 mg), benzene (20 mL) was stirred at reflux for 5 h. The benzene was distilled off and the stannylidene derivative was redissolved in toluene (10 mL) and then n-Bu4NBr (4.01 mmol, 1.29 g) and benzyl bromide (4.04 mmol, 0.48 mL) were added at 60 oC. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 h, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (15:1, toluene/EtOAc). The resulting product was dissolved in methanol (50 mL). Potassium carbonate (5 mmol, 690 mg) and Pd(PPh3)4 (0.031mmol, 29 mg) were added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) washed with H2O (50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The orgranic layer was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column
chromatography (7% to 15% Acetone/toluene) to afford the title compound as a white solid (450 mg, 40% yield). MP = 218.8-219.8 °C; Rf = 0.71 (50% ethyl acetate/hexane); [α]23
D = - 37.3 (c 1.0, acetone); IR (ATR) = 3295, 1508, 12181079, 1056, 824, 692, 657 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.63-7.48 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.36 (m, 5H), 7.37-7.11 (m, 3H), 7.01-6.87 (m, 2H), 6.86-6.67 (m, 2H), 5.72 (s, 1H), 5.07-4.81 (m, 4H), 4.34 (dd, J = 10.2, 4.9 Hz, 1H), 3.84 (t, J = 10.2 Hz, 1H), 3.79-3.71 (m, 3H), 3.71-3.64 (m, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, (CD3)2CO) δ 153.5, 151.6, 140.1, 138.9, 129.3, 128.6, 128.2, 127.8, 126.9, 119.0, 116.3, 103.6, 101.6, 81.9, 81.8, 75.1, 74.7, 69.1, 66.8. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C26H26O7473.1571; Found 473.1560.
Figure imgf000097_0001
[00199] To a stirred solution of 14-B (1 mmol, 450 mg) in pyridine (10 mL) was added DMAP (5 mg) and benzoylchloride (3 mmol, 420 mg). After 24h the reaction mixture was quenched with water (10 mL), diluted with EtOAc (50 mL) and washed with an aqueous solution of CuSO4 (2 M, 3x15 mL) and brine (1x10 mL). The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (10% EtOAc/toluene) to afford the title compound as white solid (532 mg, 81%). MP = 201-201°C; Rf = 0.76 (33% EtOAc/hexane); [α]23
D = +38.9 (c 1.0, acetone); IR (ATR) = 1722, 1601, 1505, 1267, 1094, 1081, 1067, 707, 694 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.23-8.11 (m, 2H), 8.08-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.76-7.58 (m, 2H), 7.59-7.37 (m, 9H), 7.25-7.04 (m, 7H), 7.02 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 5.68 (s, 1H), 5.60 (dq, J = 11.2, 4.1, 3.4 Hz, 1H), 5.21 (dd, J = 7.9, 2.7 Hz, 1H), 4.89 (dd, J = 12.1, 2.9 Hz, 1H), 4.77 (dd, J = 12.1, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 4.48 (dd, J = 10.7, 4.9 Hz, 1H), 4.14-3.98 (m, 2H), 3.94 (t, J = 10.3 Hz, 1H), 3.68 (h, J = 4.4 Hz, 1H).13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.6, 165.4, 155.1, 146.8, 138.1, 137.5, 134.0, 133.6, 130.5, 130.2, 129.9, 129.8, 129.5, 128.9, 128.8, 128.7, 128.6, 128.4, 128.0, 126.4, 123.0, 118.7, 101.8, 101.0, 81.8, 78.2, 74.4, 73.5, 69.0, 66.9; HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C40H34O9681.2095; Found 681.2059.
Figure imgf000097_0002
[00200] 14-C (0.5 mmol, 532 mg), Cu(OTf)2 (0.020 mmol, 7.3 mg) and BH3•THF (1 M) (4 mmol, 4.0 mL) were stirred at 0ºC for 12h. After this time the solution was quenched by MeOH (1 mL), concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (20% EtOAc/toluene) to afford the title compound as white solid (510 mg, 96%). MP = 153.1-154.0 °C; Rf = 0.37 (33% EtOAc/hexane); [α]23
D = +50.8 (c 1.0, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1743, 1724, 1506, 1059, 744, 705, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.23-8.10 (m, 2H), 8.10-7.93 (m, 2H), 7.71-7.52 (m, 2H), 7.52-7.10 (m, 14H), 7.12-7.04 (m, 2H), 6.98 (dt, J = 7.5, 2.7 Hz, 2H), 5.53 (ddd, J = 9.9, 8.0, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 5.23-5.09 (m, 1H), 4.98-4.86 (m, 1H), 4.80 (dd, J = 11.2, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 4.72 (dd, J = 10.8, 1.9 Hz, 2H), 4.08-3.90 (m, 2H), 3.91-3.73 (m, 2H), 3.63 (ddd, J = 9.6, 4.6, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 1.98 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.7, 165.5, 155.14, 155.12, 146.5, 138.0, 133.9, 133.6, 130.5, 130.1, 130.0, 129.9, 129.7, 128.9, 128.8, 128.6, 128.5, 128.40, 128.39, 128.1, 123.0, 118.18, 118.17, 100.2, 82.8, 77.7, 76.1, 75.54, 75.50, 73.8, 62.1. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C40H36O9683.2252; Found 683.2216.
Figure imgf000098_0001
[00201] The above compound was prepared using known procedure (see, e.g., Shie, C-H.; Tzeng, Z-H.; Kulkarni, S. S.; Uang, B. J.; Hsu, C-Y.; Hung, S-C. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2005, 44, 1665–1668). All the data matched reported literature. General procedure for glycosylation reactions
[00202] To a stirred solution of glycosyl donor (0.1 mmol) and (1R, 2S, 5R)-(-)-Menthol (0.2 mmol, 31 mg) in dry acetonitrile (0.5 mL) was added PIFA (0.12 mmol, 52 mg) in one portion at room temperature. The reaction mixture instantaneously turned yellow. After 15 min, the solution was diluted with CH2Cl2 (2 mL) and quenched with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3 (2 mL). The organic layer was washed with H2O (3x 5mL), dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (25% EtOAc/ Hexane).
Figure imgf000098_0002
[00203] The above compound was prepared in 87% yield (59.0 mg, 0.087 mmol; 1:9, α:β) as a white solid. All data matched reported literature. See, e.g., Jansson, K.; Noori, G.;
Magnusson, G. J. Org. Chem.1990, 55, 3181-3185.
Figure imgf000099_0001
[00204] The above compound was prepared in 87% yield (59.0 mg, 0.087 mmol; 1:9, α:β) as a white solid. All data matched reported literature. See, e.g., Hotha, S.; Kashyap, S. J. Am. Chem. Soc.2006, 128, 9620-9621.
Figure imgf000099_0002
[00205] The above compound was prepared in 71% yield (50 mg, 0.071 mmol; 1:1.5, α:β) as colorless oil. α anomer, semi solid, Rf = 0.73 (20% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = +4.6 (c 1.0, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 3030, 2951, 2921, 1454, 1101, 1154, 733, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3 ) δ 7.58-7.10 (m, 2H), 5.01 (d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1H), 4.95 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.88 (d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1H), 4.71 (d, J = 11.9 Hz, 1H), 4.64-4.56 (m, 3H), 4.56-4.46 (m, 2H), 3.92 (t, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 3.88-3.73 (m, 3H), 3.58 (ddd, J = 16.8, 10.1, 3.6 Hz, 2H), 3.47 (ddd, J = 9.9, 4.8, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 2.45 (pd, J = 6.9, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 2.02 (dd, J = 10.2, 6.1 Hz, 1H), 1.79-1.53 (m, 3H), 1.52-1.34 (m, 1H), 1.34-1.19 (m, 2H), 1.12- 0.72 (m, 11H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 139.1, 138.7, 138.5, 138.4, 128.33, 128.32, 128.31, 128.26, 126.2, 127.8, 127.60, 127.56, 127.5, 127.4, 127.2, 97.9, 82.7, 76.1, 75.14, 75.09, 75.0, 73.9, 73.7, 71.3, 70.1, 48.3, 40.5, 34.5, 31.4, 25.3, 23.1, 22.4, 21.2, 16.0. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C44H54O6 701.3813; Found 701.3839. β amomer, semi solid, Rf = 0.69 (20% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = - 74.6 (c 1.0, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 3030, 2922, 1497, 1454.08, 1096, 734, 697 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.74-6.96 (m, 20H), 5.01-4.91 (m, 2H), 4.80-4.62 (m, 5H), 4.56 (t, J = 12.1 Hz, 2H), 4.09-3.88 (m, 3H), 3.87-3.52 (m, 3H), 3.29 (td, J = 10.6, 4.2 Hz, 1H), 2.19 (dd, J = 10.2, 6.2 Hz, 1H), 1.82 (dqd, J = 13.9, 9.3, 8.1, 4.7 Hz, 1H), 1.67-1.49 (m, 2H), 1.52-1.31 (m, 1H), 1.15 (ddt, J = 13.1, 10.6, 2.9 Hz, 1H), 1.05-0.54 (m, 13H); 13C NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 138.62, 138.59, 138.5, 138.3, 128.39, 128.37, 128.34, 128.33, 128.25, 128.09, 128.06, 128.0, 127.8, 127.71, 127.67, 127.58, 127.56, 127.4, 99.9, 81.1, 80.1, 75.3, 74.5, 73.2, 72.4, 72.3, 71.8, 64.5, 48.7, 42.9, 34.3, 31.6, 25.8, 23.3, 22.2, 21.1, 16.3. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C44H54O6701.3813; Found 701.3845.
Figure imgf000100_0001
[00206] The above compound was prepared in 83% yield (56.0 mg, 0.083 mmol; 1:3, α:β) as a colorless oil. All data matched reported literature. See, e.g., Hotha, S.; Kashyap, S. J. Am. Chem. Soc.2006, 128, 9620-9621.
Figure imgf000100_0002
[00207] The above compound was prepared in 64% yield (46.0 mg, 0.064 mmol; >25:1, β:α), semi solid, Rf = 0.78 (30% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = -17.0 (c 0.74, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 2953, 2921, 1721, 1453, 1265, 1050, 711, 695 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.88-7.58 (m, 4H), 7.43-7.25 (m, 10H), 7.08-7.00 (m, 2H), 6.96-6.81 (m, 3H), 5.19 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H), 4.87 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.82 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1H), 4.74-4.64 (m, 2H), 4.61 (d, J = 12.2 Hz, 1H), 4.49 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1H), 4.40 (dd, J = 10.8, 8.7 Hz, 1H), 4.17 (dd, J = 10.8, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 3.90-3.70 (m, 3H), 3.63 (ddd, J = 9.9, 4.2, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 3.39 (td, J = 10.6, 4.3 Hz, 1H), 2.27 (pd, J = 7.0, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 1.76-1.64 (m, 1H), 1.54 (ddd, J = 11.8, 7.3, 3.7 Hz, 2H), 1.34- 1.15 (m, 1H), 1.04 (tt, J = 10.5, 3.0 Hz, 1H), 0.99-0.88 (m, 1H), 0.84 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 3H), 0.78 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.73-0.59 (m, 4H), 0.38 (q, J = 11.8 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 138.7, 138.5, 138.4, 133.9, 128.8, 128.7, 128.4, 128.3, 128.2, 128.1, 128.0, 127.8, 127.6, 96.3, 80.1, 79.5, 78.0, 75.3, 74.9, 74.1, 69.5, 56.6, 47.7, 40.7, 34.5, 31.5, 25.4, 23.3, 22.3, 21.3, 16.1. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C45H51O7N 740.3558; Found
740.3593. General procedure for glycosylation reactions
To a stirred solution of glycosyl donor (0.1 mmol) and glycosyl acceptor (0.1 mmol) was added BF3.Et2O (0.1 mmol, 10
Figure imgf000101_0001
followed by PIFA (0.12 mmol, 52 mg) in one portion at room temperature. The reaction mixture instantaneously turned yellow. After 15 min, (2 mL) was added and the mixture was quenched with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3 (2 mL). The organic layer was washed with H2O (3x 5mL), concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (5%
PhMe/EtOAc).
Figure imgf000101_0002
[00208] The above compound was prepared in 80% yield (56.0 mg, 0.080mmol ; >25 :1, α:β), semi solid, Rf = 0.69 (20% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = -22.2 (c 1.0, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 2953, 2921, 1721, 1453, 1266, 1050, 711, 695 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.14-8.04 (m, 2H), 7.55 (tt, J = 7.3, 1.3 Hz, 1H), 7.40-7.20 (m, 17H), 5.51 (t, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 5.04 (d, J = 2.1 Hz, 1H), 4.90 (d, J = 10.7 Hz, 1H), 4.79 (d, J = 11.5 Hz, 1H), 4.74 (d, J = 11.9 Hz, 1H), 4.61 (d, J = 11.5 Hz, 1H), 4.54 (dd, J = 11.3, 2.3 Hz, 2H), 4.17-3.98 (m, 3H), 3.91 (dd, J = 10.7, 3.9 Hz, 1H), 3.77 (dd, J = 10.7, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 3.38 (td, J = 10.6, 4.3 Hz, 1H), 2.24-2.14 (m, 1H), 2.07 (pt, J = 7.6, 3.8 Hz, 1H), 1.63 (td, J = 7.0, 3.3 Hz, 2H), 1.36 (dddt, J = 15.3, 12.2, 8.0, 3.5 Hz, 1H), 1.22 (ddt, J = 15.5, 10.4, 3.1 Hz, 1H), 1.06-0.94 (m, 2H), 0.93 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H), 0.86 (d, J = 6.5 Hz, 3H), 0.83-0.73 (m, 4H);13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 166.2, 138.85, 138.76, 138.4, 133.4, 130.4, 130.3, 128.70, 128.66, 128.6, 128.42, 128.40, 128.38, 128.0, 127.95, 127.82, 127.76, 99.7, 82.2, 78.3, 75.6, 75.0, 73.7, 72.0, 71.9, 69.9, 69.6, 48.8, 43.0, 34.6, 31.9, 26.3, 23.7, 22.6, 21.3, 16.8. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C44H52O7715.3605; Found 715.3570.
Figure imgf000102_0001
[00209] The above compound was prepared in 75% yield (0.085 mmol, 100 mg; mixture of α and β) as a white solid. α anomer, semi solid, Rf = 0.25 (2.5% CH2Cl2/hexane); [α]20
D = +18.0 (c 0.91, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1735, 1506, 1064, 1064, 754, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.14 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.65 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.40 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.38-7.19 (m, 31H), 7.17-7.09 (m, 6H), 5.04-4.91 (m, 6H), 4.82 (td, J = 9.8, 8.7, 5.8 Hz, 3H), 4.79-4.72 (m, 3H), 4.59 (d, J = 12.2 Hz, 1H), 4.46 (dd, J = 15.9, 11.6 Hz, 2H), 3.98 (t, J = 9.3 Hz, 1H), 3.93-3.50 (m, 12H); 13C NMR (125 MHz,CDCl3) δ 165.6, 155.4, 146.5, 139.2, 138.9, 138.81, 138.77, 138.54, 138.46, 138.3, 133.8, 130.5, 129.9, 128.84, 128.77, 128.7, 128.65, 128.63, 128.5, 128.30, 128.22, 128.18, 128.15, 128.13, 127.97, 127.94, 127.8, 123.0, 118.8, 102.8, 97.7, 84.9, 82.4, 82.1, 80.4, 78.0, 77.9, 76.05, 75.99, 75.5, 75.4, 75.22, 75.18, 73.6, 73.0, 70.5, 68.8, 66.4. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C74H72O131191.4865; Found 1191.4789.
β amomer, white solid. MP = 149.8-151.4 °C; Rf = 0.09 (CH2Cl2/hexane, 6:1); [α]21
D = -2.2 (c 1.1, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1733, 1506, 1273, 1196, 1064, 750, 694 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.18-8.10 (m, 2H), 7.67-7.58 (m, 1H), 7.48 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.38– 7.20 (m, 33H), 7.15 (dd, J = 7.2, 2.4 Hz, 2H), 7.12-7.09 (m, 2H), 7.05-6.98 (m, 2H), 5.04 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 5.01-4.91 (m, 4H), 4.85-4.75 (m, 5H), 4.70 (d, J = 11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.61-4.55 (m, 2H), 4.51 (dd, J = 13.9, 11.5 Hz, 2H), 4.45 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.17 (dd, J = 10.7, 4.2 Hz, 1H), 3.83-3.64 (m, 6H), 3.61-3.54 (m, 2H), 3.48 (qd, J = 8.6, 4.2 Hz, 2H), 3.41 (dt, J = 9.5, 3.1 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.5, 155.1, 146.2, 139.0, 138.8, 138.7, 138.5, 138.4, 138.2, 133.8, 130.5, 129.9, 128.84, 128.80, 128.76, 128.74, 128.68, 128.66, 128.63, 128.60, 128.58, 128.51, 128.34, 128.27, 128.23, 128.15, 128.03, 128.02, 127.91, 127.89, 127.86, 122.9, 117.8, 104.2, 101.8, 85.0, 84.9, 82.6, 82.3, 78.4, 78.2, 76.1, 75.7, 75.40, 75.37, 75.3, 75.10, 73.8, 69.3, 69.0. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C74H72O131191.4865; Found 1191.4872.
Figure imgf000103_0001
[00210] The above compound was prepared in 75% yield (0.085 mmol, 100 mg; mixture of α and β) as a white solid. All data matched reported literature. See, e.g., Garcia, B. A.; Gin, D. Y. J. Am. Chem. Soc.2000, 122, 4269-4279.
Figure imgf000103_0002
[00211] Semi solid, Rf = 0.70 (33% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = +24.8(c 1.3, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1720.45, 1219.23 , 1054.52, 709.07, 696.88 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.99 (dd, J = 8.1, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 7.59-7.50 (m, 1H), 7.41-7.02 (m, 32H), 5.71 (t, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 5.56 (d, J = 2.1 Hz, 1H), 5.03 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 4.84 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.79 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.73 (dd, J = 11.7, 7.8 Hz, 2H), 4.67 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 4.60 (d, J = 4.0 Hz, 2H), 4.58- 4.51 (m, 2H), 4.51-4.45 (m, 3H), 4.42 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 4.09-3.99 (m, 2H), 3.96 (t, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 3.90-3.80 (m, 2H), 3.78-3.68 (m, 4H), 3.55 (td, J = 9.5, 8.7, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.40 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.6, 138.84, 138.82, 138.6, 138.5, 138.4, 138.29, 133.26, 130.28, 130.25, 128.8, 128.62, 128.58, 128.55, 128.51, 128.48, 128.33, 128.29, 128.27, 127.90, 127.87, 127.82, 127.80, 127.77, 127.73, 127.63, 99.6, 98.1, 82.0, 80.5, 78.5, 76.0, 75.7, 75.6, 74.4, 73.8, 73.7, 73.6, 73.0, 71.7, 69.9, 69.6, 69.4, 69.3, 55.6. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C62H62O131023.4290; Found 1023.4230
Figure imgf000103_0003
[00212] The above compound was prepared in 80% yield (0.080 mmol, 93.0 mg; >25:1, α:β) as a semi solid, R 1
f = (33% EtOAc/hexane); [α]2
D = -10.8(c 0.5, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1730, 1273, 1196, 1064, 751, 696 cm−1; 8.17 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 2H), 8.13 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.68 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.48-7.10 (m, 36H), 5.75 (s, 1H), 5.14 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 5.10-5.01 (m, 3H), 4.98-4.85 (m, 5H), 4.75 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 4.65-4.57 (m, 3H), 4.57-4.50 (m, 2H), 4.13 (d, J = 5.8 Hz, 2H), 3.93 (dd, J = 10.9, 6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.87-3.80 (m, 3H), 3.78-3.66 (m, 2H), 3.61 (t, J = 8.9 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.9, 165.6, 155.4, 146.6, 138.9, 138.8, 138.7, 138.5, 138.3, 138.2, 133.8, 133.4, 130.5, 130.3, 130.2, 129.85, 128.82, 128.78, 128.75, 128.71, 128.67, 128.61, 128.57, 128.52, 128.46, 128.42, 128.21, 128.15, 128.10, 128.04, 128.03, 127.9, 127.8, 127.72, 127.70, 123.0, 118.9, 102.8, 98.3, 85.0, 82.3, 78.4, 78.0, 76.1, 75.43, 75.39, 75.3, 74.52, 74.48, 73.6, 72.0, 71.9, 69.2, 69.0, 66.8. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C74H70O141205.4658; Found 1205.4692
Figure imgf000104_0001
[00213] The above compound was prepared in 82% yield (0.082 mmol, 96.0 mg; >25:1, β:α) as a white solid. MP = 138-140 ºC; Rf = 0.75 (50% EtOAc/Hexane); [α]22
D = -10.78º (c 0.5, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1729, 1642, 1503, 1452, 1266, 1192, 1067 cm -1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.23 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 7.94 (d, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.67 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.48 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.13 (m, 36H), 5.37 (t, J = 8 Hz, 1H), 5.03 (d, J = 11Hz, 1H), 4.92 (dd, J = 8.8, 6.6 Hz, 2H), 4.83 (t, J = 11.7 Hz, 2H), 4.77 (dd, J = 11.1, 6.2 Hz, 2H), 4.71-4.64 (m, 3H), 4.62 (dd, J = 11.5, 4.8 Hz, 2H), 4.55 (s, 1H), 4.54-4.47 (m, 1H), 4.17 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 3.84-3.72 (m, 5H), 3.69 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H), 3.64 (dd, J = 15.3, 4.3 Hz, 1H), 3.59-3.48 (m, 2H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.3, 165.1, 155.1, 146.0, 138.5, 138.20, 138.15, 137.99, 137.93, 137.8, 133.6, 132.9, 130.2, 129.9, 129.7, 129.6, 128.6, 128.42, 128.39, 128.37, 128.35, 128.24, 128.23, 127.99, 127.95, 127.89, 127.81, 127.79, 127.76, 127.6, 122.6, 118.0, 102.2, 100.9, 84.5, 82.9, 81.9, 78.1, 77.4, 75.6, 75.4, 75.1, 74.99, 74.98, 74.87, 73.7, 73.6, 68.9, 67.7. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C74H70O14
1219.445; Found 1219.439.
Figure imgf000105_0001
[00214] The above was prepared in 71% yield (0.071 mmol, 70 mg; 1:1.5, α:β). The diastereomers were separated by preparative thin layer chromatography (2.5% CH3CN/CH2Cl2).
α anomer, semi solid, Rf = 0.50 (2.5% CH3CN/CH2Cl2); [α]20
D = +2.5 (c 1.0, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1754, 1503, 1214, 1188, 1038, 1023, 749, 733 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.4-7.07 (m, 25H), 7.05-6.90 (m, 4H), 5.40 (t, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 5.24 (dd, J = 9.5, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 5.05-4.96 (m, 2H), 4.88 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 1H), 4.80 (dd, J = 11.0, 6.9 Hz, 2H), 4.64 (s, 2H), 4.59-4.48 (m, 3H), 4.44 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 1H), 4.38 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1H), 4.11 (t, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 3.95 (dd, J = 11.2, 4.2 Hz, 1H), 3.89 (t, J = 9.4 Hz, 1H), 3.86-3.76 (m, 2H), 3.66 (ddd, J = 9.8, 4.1, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 3.61-3.51 (m, 2H), 3.47 (dt, J = 9.9, 3.0 Hz, 2H), 2.30 (s, 3H), 2.06 (s, 3H), 1.92 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 170.5, 170.03, 169.99, 155.0, 146.3, 139.0, 138.7, 138.4, 138.20, 138.17, 128.9, 128.74, 128.72, 128.69, 128.66, 128.64, 128.62, 128.57, 128.34, 128.31, 128.24, 128.1, 128.04, 127.95, 127.9, 127.8, 122.8, 118.2, 99.7, 98.4, 81.8, 80.4, 77.9, 76.0, 75.8, 75.3, 74.9, 74.4, 73.74, 73.71, 73.6, 72.1, 71.7, 21.4, 21.3, 21.1. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C44H54O61133.3981; Found 1133.3941. β amomer, semi solid, Rf = 0.40 (2.5% CH3CN/CH2Cl2); [α]21
D = -0.6 (c 0.91, CH2Cl2); IR (ATR) = 1753, 1502, 1454, 1276, 1261, 764, 750, 674 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.38-7.20 (m, 23H), 7.15 (dd, J = 7.5, 2.0 Hz, 2H), 7.03-6.90 (m, 4H), 5.30-5.16 (m, 2H), 5.00-4.93 (m, 1H), 4.87 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 4.82-4.72 (m, 3H), 4.70 (d, J = 11.3 Hz, 1H), 4.54-4.49 (m, 3H), 4.45 (d, J = 11.8 Hz, 1H), 4.39 (d, J = 11.9 Hz, 1H), 4.32 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.06-3.93 (m, 1H), 3.79 (dd, J = 11.0, 4.2 Hz, 1H), 3.75-3.67 (m, 3H), 3.64 (t, J = 9.4 Hz, 1H), 3.56 (ddd, J = 9.9, 4.2, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 3.51 (t, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 3.35-3.25 (m, 2H), 2.28 (s, 3H), 2.05 (s, 3H), 1.99 (s, 3H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 171.09, 170.04, 169.88, 155.1, 146.3, 138.9, 138.7, 138.6, 138.2, 138.1, 128.76, 128.72, 128.70, 128.69, 128.14, 128.07, 128.05, 128.01, 127.96, 127.91, 127.88, 122.8, 118.2, 103.2, 100.0, 85.1, 82.8, 77.9, 75.8, 75.7, 75.4, 75.2, 75.0, 74.8, 73.7, 73.5, 73.0, 71.7, 69.1, 67.8, 21.4, 21.08, 21.05. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C44H54O61033.3983; Found 1033.3973. Examples of iterative glycosylations
[00215] Scheme 9 shows examples of an iterative glycosylation/deprotection/glycosylation reacrtions to access polysaccharides. Another example of this is shown below in Scheme 15. Scheme 15
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000106_0002
Procedures for Scheme 15
Figure imgf000106_0003
[00216] To a stirred solution of 30 (0.1 mmol) and 48 (0.11 mmol) in a mixture of CH2Cl2 (0.5 mL) and CH3CN (0.5 mL) was added BF3.Et2O (0.1 mmol, 10 µL) followed by PIFA (0.11 mmol, 48 mg) in one portion at room temperature. The reaction mixture instantaneously turned yellow. After 1 hour, the mixture was quenched with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3 (2 mL) then diluted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL). The organic layer was washed with H2O (3x 5mL), concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (5% PhMe/EtOAc) to give 9-A as a semi solid (75%, 0.075 mmol, 88 mg; >25:1, β:α). Rf = 0.70 (33% EtOAc/hexane); [α]21
D = +20.5 (c 1.0, THF); IR (ATR) = 1722, 1262, 1107, 1026, 750, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.20 (dd, J = 7.9, 1.6 Hz, 2H), 8.02 (dd, J = 8.0, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 7.95 (dd, J = 8.2, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 7.74-7.62 (m, 1H), 7.62-7.55 (m, 1H), 7.55-7.41 (m, 5H), 7.40-7.28 (m, 13H), 7.26-7.12 (m, 14H), 7.03- 6.96 (m, 4H), 5.52 (dd, J = 9.3, 7.7 Hz, 1H), 5.39 (dq, J = 8.6, 7.0 Hz, 1H), 5.01 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.89-4.81 (m, 1H), 4.78-4.55 (m, 10H), 4.26-4.14 (m, 1H), 3.90-3.74 (m, 7H), 3.70 (t, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 3.60 (ddd, J = 9.3, 4.5, 2.2 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.55, 165.49, 165.46, 155.4, 146.4, 138.5, 138.3, 138.12, 138.06, 138.0, 133.8, 133.5, 133.3, 130.4, 130.14, 130.09, 130.06, 130.04, 129.9, 128.9, 128.74, 128.73, 128.71, 128.70, 128.68, 128.64, 128.56, 128.54, 128.35, 128.31, 128.28, 128.27, 128.15, 128.12, 128.09, 128.06, 127.97, 127.9, 122.8, 118.5, 101.3, 100.5, 83.2, 82.8, 78.3, 78.0, 75.6, 75.5, 75.4, 75.30, 75.27, 75.2, 74.0, 73.9, 73.7, 69.18, 68.15. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C74H68O151219.4450; Found 1219.4390.
Figure imgf000107_0001
[00217] To a stirred solution of 9-A (0.075mmol, 86 mg) in THF (2 mL) was added ethanolamine (6 mmol, 366 mg) at room temperature. After for 24 hours the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (15% EtOAc/toluene) to afford the title compound 50 as a semi solid (85%, 0.063 mmol, 69 mg). Rf = 0.33 (33% EtOAc/hexane); [α]22
D = +22.1 (c 1.0, dichloromethane); IR (ATR) = 3520, 1722, 1512, 1263, 1060, 1026, 733, 707 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.04-7.97 (m, 2H), 7.95-7.87 (m, 2H), 7.60-7.55 (m, 1H), 7.52-7.47 (m, 1H), 7.44 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.37-7.27 (m, 14H), 7.20 (td, J = 7.1, 6.4, 2.1 Hz, 4H), 7.16- 7.10 (m, 9H), 6.88 -6.75 (m, 2H), 6.68-6.52 (m, 2H), 5.45 (dd, J = 9.4, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 5.35-5.26 (m, 1H), 5.17 (d, J = 3.5 Hz, 1H), 4.88 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.83 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 1H), 4.76 (d, J = 11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.72-4.60 (m, 6H), 4.60-4.52 (m, 3H), 4.14 (dd, J = 11.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.83-3.73 (m, 6H), 3.66-3.59 (m, 2H), 3.54 (ddd, J = 9.3, 4.5, 2.1 Hz, 1H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.24, 165.22, 151.6, 151.2, 138.1, 137.89, 137.87, 137.7, 133.2, 133.00, 129.90, 129.83, 129.78, 129.76, 128.54, 128.49, 128.45, 128.43, 128.36, 128.29, 128.25, 128.11, 128.05, 128.01, 127.98, 127.94, 127.89, 127.86, 127.83, 127.81, 127.66, 127.64, 119.2, 100.80, 100.75, 82.9, 82.6, 78.2, 77.7, 75.6, 75.2, 75.1, 74.99, 74.95, 73.7, 73.58, 73.56, 68.8, 67.6. HRMS (ESI) m/z: [M+Na]+ cacld for C67H64O141115.3928; Found
1115.3888.
Figure imgf000108_0001
[00218] To a stirred solution of glycosyl donor 50 (0.058 mmol) and glycosyl acceptor 48 (0.064 mmol) in a mixture of CH2Cl2 (0.5 mL) and CH3CN (0.5 mL) was added BF3.Et2O (0.058 mmol, 7 µL) followed by PIFA (0.064 mmol, 28 mg) in one portion at room temperature. After 1 hour, the mixture was quenched with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3 (2 mL) then diluted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL). The organic layer was washed with H2O (3x 5mL), concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (5% PhMe/EtOAc) to give an inseparable mixture of desired glycosylated product and unreacted glycosyl donor. The mixture was dissolved in THF (2 mL) and ethanol amine (0.1 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature. After for 24 hours the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was purified with silica gel column chromatography (15% EtOAc/toluene) to afford the title compound as a semi solid (55%, 0.032 mmol, 50 mg).Semi solid, Rf = 0.23 (33%
EtOAc/hexane); [α]22
D = +4.6 (c 1.0, dichloromethane); IR (ATR) = 3522, 1725, 1265, 1090, 1026, 709, 696 cm−1; 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.09-8.00 (m, 2H), 7.96 (dd, J = 7.8, 3.5 Hz, 2H), 7.90 (dd, J = 8.1, 3.5 Hz, 2H), 7.57 (dt, J = 17.6, 9.0 Hz, 2H), 7.45 (ddt, J = 11.4, 7.8, 4.8 Hz, 4H), 7.40-7.01 (m, 38H), 6.87 (dd, J = 9.0, 3.7 Hz, 2H), 6.67 (dd, J = 8.8, 3.6 Hz, 2H), 5.51-5.40 (m, 1H), 5.37 (td, J = 8.7, 3.8 Hz, 1H), 5.32 (d, J = 3.7 Hz, 1H), 5.25 (td, J = 8.3, 3.6 Hz, 1H), 4.97-4.88 (m, 1H), 4.81 (dq, J = 10.8, 7.1, 6.3 Hz, 1H), 4.76 (dd, J = 11.3, 3.6 Hz, 1H), 4.72-4.45 (m, 12H), 4.38 (dd, J = 11.0, 3.5 Hz, 1H), 4.19-4.09 (m, 1H), 4.02- 3.89 (m, 1H), 3.89-3.46 (m, 14H); 13C NMR (125 MHz, CDCl3) δ 165.3, 165.1, 164.9, 151.8, 150.9, 138.1, 137.91, 137.89, 137.85, 137.82, 137.80, 133.11, 133.08, 132.92, 129.95, 129.87, 129.82, 129.79, 129.75, 129.72, 128.47, 128.45, 128.43, 128.41, 128.38, 128.33, 128.31, 128.26, 128.24, 128.19, 128.15, 128.10, 128.06, 127.99, 127.95, 127.92, 127.90, 127.87, 127.86, 127.80, 127.77, 127.75, 127.70, 127.63, 127.55, 127.51, 119.6, 116.0, 101.4, 100.6, 100.5, 82.69, 82.67, 82.64, 78.1, 77.7, 77.5, 77.3, 77.0, 76.8, 75.1, 75.0, 74.9, 74.81, 74.78, 74.74, 74.71, 74.5, 74.0, 73.68, 73.66, 73.5, 68.9, 68.7, 67.2. HRMS (ESI) m/z:
[M+Na]+ cacld for C94H90O201561.5918; Found 1561.5863. EQUIVALENTS AND SCOPE
[00219] In the claims articles such as“a,”“an,” and“the” may mean one or more than one unless indicated to the contrary or otherwise evident from the context. Claims or descriptions that include“or” between one or more members of a group are considered satisfied if one, more than one, or all of the group members are present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process unless indicated to the contrary or otherwise evident from the context. The invention includes embodiments in which exactly one member of the group is present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process. The invention includes embodiments in which more than one, or all of the group members are present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process.
[00220] Furthermore, the invention encompasses all variations, combinations, and permutations in which one or more limitations, elements, clauses, and descriptive terms from one or more of the listed claims is introduced into another claim. For example, any claim that is dependent on another claim can be modified to include one or more limitations found in any other claim that is dependent on the same base claim. Where elements are presented as lists, e.g., in Markush group format, each subgroup of the elements is also disclosed, and any element(s) can be removed from the group. It should it be understood that, in general, where the invention, or aspects of the invention, is/are referred to as comprising particular elements and/or features, certain embodiments of the invention or aspects of the invention consist, or consist essentially of, such elements and/or features. For purposes of simplicity, those embodiments have not been specifically set forth in haec verba herein.
[00221] It is also noted that the terms“comprising” and“containing” are intended to be open and permits the inclusion of additional elements or steps. Where ranges are given, endpoints are included. Furthermore, unless otherwise indicated or otherwise evident from the context and understanding of one of ordinary skill in the art, values that are expressed as ranges can assume any specific value or sub-range within the stated ranges in different embodiments of the invention, to the tenth of the unit of the lower limit of the range, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
[00222] This application refers to various issued patents, published patent applications, journal articles, and other publications, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. If there is a conflict between any of the incorporated references and the instant specification, the specification shall control. In addition, any particular embodiment of the present invention that falls within the prior art may be explicitly excluded from any one or more of the claims. Because such embodiments are deemed to be known to one of ordinary skill in the art, they may be excluded even if the exclusion is not set forth explicitly herein. Any particular embodiment of the invention can be excluded from any claim, for any reason, whether or not related to the existence of prior art.
[00223] Those skilled in the art will recognize or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation many equivalents to the specific embodiments described herein. The scope of the present embodiments described herein is not intended to be limited to the above Description, but rather is as set forth in the appended claims. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that various changes and modifications to this description may be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the present invention, as defined in the following claims.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. A compound of the following formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000111_0001
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000111_0002
or a salt thereof.
3. The compound of claim 2, wherein the compound is of the following formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000111_0003
4. A compound of the following formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000112_0001
5. The compound of claim 3, wherein the compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000112_0002
or a salt thereof.
6. The compound of claim 5, wherein the compound is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000112_0003
or a salt thereof.
7. A compound of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000112_0004
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000113_0001
8. The compound of claim 5, wherein the compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000113_0002
or a salt thereof.
9. A compound of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000113_0003
Figure imgf000114_0001
or a salt thereof, wherein:
R1 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted carbocyclyl, or optionally substituted acyl.
10. The compound of claim 9, wherein the compound is of one of the following formulae:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000115_0001
11. The compound of claims 9 or 10, wherein R1 is optionally substituted aryl, or a salt thereof.
12. The compound of claim 11, wherein R1 is optionally substituted phenyl, or a salt thereof.
13. The compound of claim 12, wherein R1 is unsubstituted phenyl, or a salt thereof.
14. The com ound of claim 9 wherein the com ound is of one of the followin formulae:
Figure imgf000115_0002
Figure imgf000116_0001
or a salt thereof .
15. The compound of claim 14, wherein the com ound is of the following formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000116_0002
16. The compound of claim 14, wherein the compound is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000117_0001
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000117_0002
17. The compound of claim 9, wherein the compound is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000117_0003
Figure imgf000118_0001
or a salt thereof .
18. The compound of claim 17, wherein the com ound is of the following formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000118_0002
19. The compound of claim 17, wherein the compound is of the following formula:
or a salt thereof.
Figure imgf000119_0001
20. A method for glycosylating a hydroxyl-containing organic compound, the method comprising contacting a compound of any one of claims 1-8, or a salt thereof, with a hydroxyl-containing organic compound of the formula R2–OH, or a salt thereof, in the presence of an oxidant to yield a glycosylation product of Formula (S-1):
Figure imgf000119_0002
or a salt thereof, wherein the group corres ondin to:
Figure imgf000119_0003
is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000119_0004
and R2 is an organic compound.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein the group corresponding to:
is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000120_0003
Figure imgf000120_0002
22. The method of claim 21, wherein the group corresponding to:
is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000120_0005
Figure imgf000120_0004
23. The method of claim 22, wherein the group corresponding to:
is of the following formula:
Figure imgf000120_0006
Figure imgf000120_0007
24. The method of claim 20, wherein the hydroxyl-containing organic compound is a monosaccharide; and the compound of Formula (S-1) is a disaccharide.
25. The method of claim 20, wherein the hydroxyl-containing organic compound is a compound of any one of claims 9-19; and the compound of Formula (S-1) is a disaccharide.
26. The method of claim 25, wherein R2 is of any one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
27. The method of claim 25 or 26, wherein R1 is optionally substituted aryl.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein R1 is optionally substituted phenyl.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein R1 is unsubstituted phenyl.
30. The method of any one of claims 20-29, wherein R2 is of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
31. The method of any one of claims 20-30, wherein the compound of Formula (S-1) is formed with a β:α anomeric ratio of greater than 3:1.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 10:1.
33. The method of claim 31, wherein the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 20:1.
34. The method of claim 31, wherein the β:α anomeric ratio is greater than 25:1.
35. The method of any one of claims 20-30, wherein the compound of Formula (S-1) is formed with a α:β anomeric ratio of greater than 3:1.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 10:1.
37. The method of claim 35, wherein the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 20:1.
38. The method of claim 35, wherein the α:β anomeric ratio is greater than 25:1.
39. The method of any one of claims 20-38, wherein the oxidant is a hypervalent iodine reagent.
40. The method of claim 39, wherein the oxidant is (bis(trifluoroacetoxy)iodo)benzene (PIFA).
41. The method of any one of claims 20-40, wherein approximately 1.0-1.1 equivalents of the oxidant is used.
42. The method of any one of claims 20-41, wherein the step of glycosylating is carried out in the presence of a Lewis acid.
43. The method of claim 42, wherein the Lewis acid is a boron trifluoride diethyletherate (BF3•OEt2).
44. The method of claim 42 or 43, wherein approximately 1.0-1.1 equivalents of the Lewis acid is used.
45. The method of any one of claims 20-44, wherein the step of glycosylating is carried out in a solvent.
46. The method of claim 45, wherein the solvent is acetonitrile.
47. The method of claim 45, wherein the solvent is CH2Cl2 (DCM).
48. The method of claim 45, wherein the solvent is a acetonitrile/DCM mixture.
49. The method of any one of claims 20-48, wherein the step of glycosylating is carried out at or around room temperature.
50. The method of any one of claims 25-49, further comprising steps of:
(a) deprotecting the phenolic ester of the glycosylation product to convert the group corresponding to the formula:
Figure imgf000125_0001
to a group of the following formula:
Figure imgf000125_0002
(b) contacting the compound provided in step (a) with a hydroxyl-containing organic compound of the formula R2–OH, or salt thereof, in the presence of an oxidant, thereby yielding a second glycosylation product.
51. The method of claim 50, wherein the hydroxyl organic compound of formula R2–OH is a compound of any one of claims 9-19.
52. The method of claim 50, wherein the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of an alcohol, hydroxide, alkoxide.
53. The method of claim 50, wherein the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of sodium methoxide.
54. The method of claim 50, wherein the step of deprotecting is carried out in the presence of ethanolamine.
55. The method of claim 54, wherein the ethanolamine is used in excess.
56. The method of any one of claims 50-55, wherein the step of deprotection is carried out in a solvent.
57. The method of claim 56, wherein the solvent is THF.
58. The method of any one of claims 20-57 further comprising the steps of: (c) deprotecting a hydroxyl group of a glycosylation product compound to yield a compound comprising a hydroxyl group;
(d) glycosylating the compound provided in step (c) by contacting the hydroxyl- containing organic compound provided in step (c) with a compound of any one of claims 1-9 in the presence of an oxidant, thereby yielding a glycosylation product.
59. The method of any one of claims 20-58 further comprising one or more iterative steps of deprotecting and glycosylating to yield a disaccharide, trisaccharide, polysaccharide, or glycan.
60. A kit comprising one or more compounds according to any one of claims 1-19;
optionally one or more chemical reagents; and optionally instructions for use.
PCT/US2017/047519 2016-08-19 2017-08-18 Reagents and methods for glycosylation Ceased WO2018035416A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201662377271P 2016-08-19 2016-08-19
US62/377,271 2016-08-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018035416A1 true WO2018035416A1 (en) 2018-02-22

Family

ID=61197447

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2017/047519 Ceased WO2018035416A1 (en) 2016-08-19 2017-08-18 Reagents and methods for glycosylation

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018035416A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115073540A (en) * 2022-07-28 2022-09-20 四川大学 Synthesis method of inulin type sucrose oligosaccharide monomer

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6245902B1 (en) * 1999-08-09 2001-06-12 University Of Iowa Research Foundation C-glycoside analogs and methods for their preparation and use
US20150099870A1 (en) * 2013-10-04 2015-04-09 Trustees Of Tufts College Glycosylation Reactions Using Phenyl(trifluoroethyl)iodonium Salts

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6245902B1 (en) * 1999-08-09 2001-06-12 University Of Iowa Research Foundation C-glycoside analogs and methods for their preparation and use
US20150099870A1 (en) * 2013-10-04 2015-04-09 Trustees Of Tufts College Glycosylation Reactions Using Phenyl(trifluoroethyl)iodonium Salts

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DATABASE Pubchem [O] 28 April 2015 (2015-04-28), XP028042015, Database accession no. 91696864 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115073540A (en) * 2022-07-28 2022-09-20 四川大学 Synthesis method of inulin type sucrose oligosaccharide monomer
CN115073540B (en) * 2022-07-28 2023-08-25 四川大学 Synthesis method of inulin type kestose oligosaccharide monomer

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11008358B2 (en) Synthesis of desosamines
US11767341B2 (en) Lincosamide antibiotics and uses thereof
US11535643B2 (en) Macrolides with modified desosamine sugars and uses thereof
US11498892B2 (en) Fe/Cu-mediated ketone synthesis
EP3389669B1 (en) Triterpene saponin variants, methods of synthesis and use thereof
IL310280A (en) Macrolides with 13 members converted to C10-cyclic and their uses
US9902985B2 (en) Chemoenzymatic methods for synthesizing moenomycin analogs
US20230135188A1 (en) Fe/cu-mediated ketone synthesis
WO2018035416A1 (en) Reagents and methods for glycosylation
US20230357286A1 (en) Ketone synthesis and applications
US20230242565A1 (en) Macrolides with Modified Desosamine Sugars and Uses Thereof
US11566039B2 (en) Lincosamide antibiotics and uses thereof
US9822140B2 (en) Methods and intermediates for the preparation of fondaparinux
US20240262851A1 (en) Cyclopropene phosphoramidites and conjugates thereof
WO2026025019A1 (en) Synthesis of macrobicyclic thiolincosamines
AU2023255378A1 (en) Lincosamides and uses thereof
WO2019032941A1 (en) Lincosamide antibiotics and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17842181

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17842181

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1